Aftermath of the Arapet Horror

29 Sarnia – 3 Metisto 3020

On their return to the surface the Hand of Fortune found a dazed and bewildered populace stumbling out of their homes into the dawn light. The previous day’s overcast had disappeared during the night, and the new day promised to be clear and hot, Korwin sensed. It seemed that, with the severing of the connection between Novendo and the alien dimension, the mind-altering effects of the aliens had entirely vanished – as had the mysterious obelisk in Fisherman’s Square.

Unfortunately, the townsfolk who had been taken “down underneath” to have their brains stored were not restored, nor were those whose bodies had been worn by the foul invaders. The initial joy in town at their sudden deliverance was quickly tempered by grief when it became clear that some 150 souls had been lost during the terrible episode. Everyone seemed to remember the last several tendays both clearly, and yet with a certain glassy detachment… as if it had all happened to someone else.

“I r’member t’all right clear,” Vidalo Karvek tried to explain to Mariala. She had seen him and his son stumbling, dazed and bewildered, out of a house as the Hand made their way – slowly, for the sake of the man Erol and Devrik carried in their make-shift litter – in search of the residence of the town physician’s. She had realized almost at once who they must be, for the boy bore a strong resemblance to both his sister and his father. “Clear… but more like t’were a story I once heard… not like a real t’ing what ‘appened to me, if’n you take my meaning, Lady.”

She’d been pleased to tell him that his wife and daughter were safe, and where they could be found – a relief to her soul in the face of the night’s horrors. He in turn was able to both identify the injured man as Danir Alvador, the local mercantyler who ran the town’s only chandlery, and to lead them to the sought-after physician. As soon as he’d seen them properly arrived, Vidalo and his son had departed to reunite with their family. From Enab’s Steading the news of the visitor’s work overnight would spread quickly, and by afternoon the entire island would come to know of the town’s rescue.

Once they had delivered their burden safely, Devrik insisted on returning to the caverns to make sure that none of the Mi-Go (as several of the formerly enthralled natives insisted the aliens were named) had survived his sterilization efforts. Erol, Korwin and Toran accompanied him, leaving Vulk and Mariala to address the growing crowd of bewildered and frightened townsfolk, who had begun to gather outside the physician’s house.

Vulk used every trick in the herald’s playbook, as well as all the teachings of the Eldaran Church, to calm, reassure and console the people. By the time the others returned with the welcome news that not a trace of the alien infestation remained, the crowd was ready to begin the process of reclaiming their lives. The grieving could begin, now that the survivors were assured of their safety; but Mariala suspected the nightmares would go on for the rest of their fractured lives.

By noon the Hand were able get away from town and return to the Legate’s manor to report on the nights events. They had discovered two of his men still amongst the living, but had found no trace of his guard captain. The confused memories of the two surviving men indicated that the captain had been heavily involved in planning the ship’s route, but what that route supposed to have been they had no idea… they themselves been mostly used as strong backs for building the vessel.

“A pity,” Legate Charkress sighed on learning of the probable fate of his man. “Frongar was a good man, conscientious and capable. No doubt why those… creatures… found him useful. He also knew a great deal about the geography of the Archipelago and the capabilities of the Imperial military, naval history being a particular hobby of his.

“I wonder if his brain ended up in one of those hideous jars you described…” He looked pale and shaken at the thought. He had listened in horrified fascination as the Hand related the terrifying underground events of the previous night, and he now passed around a crystal decanter of very potent rum. His hands were too unsteady to pour for his guests. “I cannot express my gratitude for what you have done sers , m’lady. I fear the debt which the Empire, indeed the world, owes you can never be wholly repaid in this matter, but what ever I can do, rest assured I shall!”

“Well, we just did what any group of highly trained and personally powerful professional adventurers would have done, my lord,” Korwin said modestly. “But it’s nice to be appreciate, ser. As for reward… what are your plans for that ship in your harbor?”

As it turned out, neither the Legate nor any of the townsmen wanted anything to do with the “accursed nightmare ship” and were more than happy to let the Hand of Fortune take it off their quay and their thoughts. Korwin immediately took on the job of getting the vessel fully seaworthy. Thankfully, most of the final outfitting work had already been completed — the ship would have been ready to sail in a day or two. Less good was the fact that none of the townsfolk seemed now to remember anything of the shipwright’s arts… nor wished to set foot on the vessel again, even if they did.

Fortunately, Korwin and the local fishing fleet had enough expertise, between them, to suffice for what remained to be done… even if would take them a bit longer without the efficiency alien mind control and implanted knowledge. The water mage had been worried that finding a crew might prove impossible, but once it was learned that the heroes of the hour would be sailing away in the ominous vessel, a trickle of islanders desperately wishing to get off of Arapet became, if not a flood, at least a solid stream.

One exception to the general feeling of loathing evoked by the ship was Yonas Grünbay. A retired merchant sailor of 60, he had returned to his native island after a full career at sea — almost 40 years before the mast. Childless, and a widower now in the wake of the recent tragedy, there was nothing holding him to Arapet, and too many memories driving him away.

“And whatever her origins, she’s a right beauty,” he’d told Korwin when he approached the mage the next day, as he was beginning to assess the task he faced. “Tightest ship I’ve seen in two score years at sea, Ser, and I’d be more’n happy to be yer mate for the chance to sail her… as long as ’tis far from this acursed island.”

The man was certainly right about the tightness of the vessel. Korwin had just come up from the bilges himself, and been shocked at the almost total absence of water there. All ships leaked to some extent, and new ships were notorious for the amount of water they took on until everything settled into place, with time and usage. But not this ship – and he rather expected that she’d remain tight under sail.

With a few minutes of questioning Korwin quickly realized what a gem he’d lucked across. Although he had studied under a master shipwright, and knew his way around the basics of building and maintaining a vessel, the water mage knew his own limitations. Growing up in a fishing village, in a fishing family, he was certainly a passable sailor; he was even a member of the Pilot’s Guild (although he suspected his dues were probably somewhat in arrears by now). Nonetheless, having a man who had spent his life aboard ship, serving as everything from deck boy to mate, would be a godsend. Or maybe a goddessend…

He accepted Yonas’ offer with alacrity, and immediately turned over the task of interviewing the growing line of people, mostly young men, who wished to sign on. “It’s a relief,” he assured his compatriots over supper that night with the Legate. “He’ll do a much better job than I would’ve, sorting out the utterly hopeless from the merely clueless. I just hope we can find enough likely candidates to properly man the — hey, what are we going to name her, anyway? She has to have a name!”

“Well, The Norn seems like an obvious choice,” Toran offered. “If it wasn’t for his direction we never would have come here in time. So if we’re really taking possession of the thing, maybe we should name it after her.”

“A ship is always a “she,” my non-sea-faring Khundari lout, never an “it”!”” Korwin corrected his friend, laughing. “But that’s actually not a bad name.”

“Yes,” agreed Devrik, reluctantly. “But I feel it’s really Kasira we should be thanking for this victory… and so many of our others, too. Besides, no one else in the world has ever heard of the Norn, nor are they ever likely to. Maybe a better name would be something like… Kasira’s Wind?

“I think you’re on the right track,” Vulk said, smiling. “But frankly, that sounds like the Lady is passing gas. How about… Wind of Kasira, instead?”

There was a brisk discussion about which sounded more pleasing to the ear, but by the time the dessert wine was being poured a consensus had been reached – Wind of Karsira it would be.

The next day was the first of Metisto and the Shalaran holy day of the Fête of Wisdom. Her friends, with the enthusiastic help of the townsfolks, used the occasion to throw Mariala a belated birthday party. Control of the event quickly slipped out of Vulk’s hands, however, under the relentless enthusiasm of Erala Karvek and her cronies. It quickly grew to encompass a day of thanksgiving and remembrance for the town, a bon voyage for those leaving, and a christening ceremony for the ship, on top of the birthday.

After a bottle of wine was broken across her prow, formally naming the Wind of Kasira, Legate Charkress opened his manor to the town, and the party grew so large that it spilled out onto the Residence’s grounds, with tables set up on the lawns and under the trees. It was a beautiful summer night , and the combined birthday celebration and wake went on until well past midnight. Speeches were made, toasts were offered – to the birthday girl, to the town’s saviors, and in memory of the towns dead.

After accepting universal congratulations for having achieved 26 years, and once the tone of the event turned somber as the evening (and the wine) went on, Mariala slipped away to the small Eldaran temple at the edge of the town. As with all such rural places, it was made to do duty for all 16 of the Immortals venerated by the Church. She knelt before the small alcove dedicate to Shala and, for a turn of the glass, offered up her usual holy day offering of deep meditation.

In the end she didn’t feel it had been her best offering, however… she was still too shaken by the horrors she’s witnessed, and the disturbing implications that such things could exist anywhere in a rational cosmos. With one last fervent prayer to Shala that such things might never again find their way into her world, at least, she rose and stepped outside.

Reaching into the scrip at her waist she pulled forth a small ceramic vial, and broke the wax seal covering the stopper. A sharp, astringent scent wafted up and sent a thrill down her spine. She lifted the vial to her lips, then paused… this was the last dose of Lyrin oil she had, and she’d been putting off using it, despite the increasing cravings. But she very much feared that it was her semi-withdrawal that had caused the terrible misfiring of her Fire Nerves spell two nights ago in the caverns… and she couldn’t afford such a mistake again.

But they would be home in a few days, no more than half a tenday, surely… and then she would be able to renew her supply. She might even be able to acquire more in this larger town, Tishton, they were sailing for tomorrow… the Legate had said it was actually a city of some size, a minor provincial capital. Of course it was a minor provincial capital of the Ocean Empire, and Lyrin was most certainly illegal under Imperial law. Not as frowned upon as more dangerous substances, perhaps, but in a land unfamiliar to her it would be foolish to try and procure any illegal drug. Probably. Not unless the need became dire…

But surely it wouldn’t! The Legate assured them there was a Nirtaran Portal on Chakal, and once they located it Vulk or Devrik would have them home in a trice! With a firm nod, she tossed back the vial and let the cool liquid pour down her throat, its blue electricity lighting up her mind…

• • •

The Hand had expected to sail the next day on the morning tide, but circumstances quickly dashed that hope. Mate Grünbay had chosen the 22 most likely candidates from the fifty or so who had applied. But all save four were landsmen, and two days had not been enough to prepare them to crew a vessel the size of Wind of Kasira.

As this morning’s fiasco with the rigging, the sails, and the crows nest had proved, Korwin thought sourly. Nothing was damaged beyond repair, and there were no actual deaths, so perhaps the fiasco had had a salutary effect on his would-be crew. Yonas assured him he’d seen worse… although when pressed he couldn’t say where, exactly.

But the near disaster had made it impossible for them to make the morning tide, and there was not a chance in all of Korön’s eight hells that Korwin or the Mate were going to risk the evening tide and a night sailing. Not with this mob of eager but mostly inept “sailors.” Under Yonas’ withering gaze the four experienced seamen spent the remainder of the day leading the ‘lubbers in several more runs through the various most vital shipboard tasks. Which left Korwin more time than was probably good for him to go over his plotted course again… on the other hand, it also allowed him time for a project he’d had to set aside earlier, under the press of events…

That evening at dinner, once again at the Legate’s table, more bad news was waiting. Mariala, looking paler than usual and with a certain unusual tension in her face, announced that she had heard back from Master Vetaris via her entangled parchment. Given the limited writing area, and the need to conserve the limited sheets each possessed, he had been forced to brevity and bluntness.

“In short, his mother is still at large, and the Star Council has yet to determined how she was able to hijack us as she did when we gated last winter. They believe it has to do with our auras – each person’s is utterly unique – but with no way to counter it, they advise that we would be foolish to travel via Nitaran Gate just now. I gather he is avoiding such travel himself, and the rest of the Council is using it only in urgent cases. No one is certain whose auras she may have… captured.”

This news upset everyone, to some degree, but it hit Devrik particularly hard. He and Raven had been in communication via the entangled paper Mariala had given them, and both had been eagerly anticipating a heated reunion in the near future. He very much feared his wife would take this news even worse than he was… and by the Void, at this rate would his son even recognize him when he did make it home?

“How long will it take to sail us home?” he demanded of Korwin once the news had sunk in.

“That’s… hard to say,” his friend replied, calculating madly in his head. He was no more pleased than Devrik at the looming prospect of having to sail the entire length of the Empire, if for other reasons. “No less than two months, and that’s assuming we can hire a competent crew and pilot. I wouldn’t even try it with the lot we have now, frankly.

“We might shave some time if we make for the Gulf of Kildora, then travel overland through the Republic and the Savage Mountains. But that could also end up taking longer, perhaps much longer, depending on… well, a lot of things we can’t control.”

It was a peeved and disgruntled Hand of Fortune that retired that night, and only Erol slept completely soundly. Toran, while not feeling any urgent need to get home quickly, was nonetheless more than a little apprehensive about an extended sea voyage. A few hours from Arapet to Tishton had seemed relatively bearable; but two or more months on the ocean?! Umantari folk legends notwithstanding, the Khundari were not made of stone, and some few of them could actually swim. But you’d never prove it by him, Toran reflected glumly as he lay awake that night – he would sink like a stone, straight to the bottom!

He’d survived several short voyages on the Sea of Ukal without undue stress (however, not with no stress), but those had been, well, short. And on a sea he was assured was relatively calm and placid. And shallow. The Shattered Sea was quite another matter! Not, he supposed, that drowning in 10 meters of water, as opposed to 1000 meters, would really matter.

One bad storm, one rogue wave, and he could find himself sleeping with the fishes forever. If he could operate a Gate himself, he’d be inclined to take the risk, but he doubted the others would agree. And he now bitterly regretted the loss of the key to the Fane of Gheas! If that still worked, he’d take his chances with its random travel in a heartbeat, ship and ocean both be damned!

The next morning, in the pre-dawn light, the Hand stood on the quay, saying goodbye to Legate Chakress and many of the the locals who had risen to see them off. The Legate handed Vulk a satchel, sealed with the Imperial Seal.

“I was up quite late, polishing the draft we worked up yesterday recounting… recent events. I appreciate your taking on the duty to deliver my report to the Prince Palatine yourself. In the past I might have used the excuse of my gout to avoid traveling, but it hasn’t bothered me since your treatment, Brother Vulk. The truth is, I simply cannot leave my charge here at this time. I failed to protect these people once, but I am determined to do all that I can to get them through the aftermath.”

He leaned in close and spoke for Vulk’s ear only. “Thank you as well for your spiritual guidance these past few days, Brother. Your counsel has brought me back to my faith in my darkest hour, and I will not falter again.” The two men clasped forearms and Vulk made a simple benediction over the older man’s bowed head. Then the Legate stepped back and turned to address the group.

“I wish for you to have this, as remembrance of your work here and of me, as you voyage forth today.” He opened a second boiled leather case he carried, revealing the beautiful spyglass they’d all peered through that first day. “I have no heirs to leave it to in any case, and I can think of no fitter place to bestow it than upon the Hand of Fortune. I’m certain that old Degalith himself would be proud to know his handiwork was so well given.” Mariala accepted for the group, amid their grateful murmurs of surprise and gratification.

While this was going on, and the last of the supplies were being taken aboard, Vidalo Karvek and his family pushed through the crowd, seeking Korwin. The smith (with the death of his master, no longer an apprentice) handed him a small bundle wrapped in a blue cloth. They spoke quietly for a moment, and Korwin tried to give him some coins, but the man refused them, gesturing to his smiling family. Korwin shrugged, and bowed acknowledgment of the point.

When the family moved off to speak with Mariala the water mage looked around for Toran. He found him near the gangway, staring moodily down at the dark, shifting waters between the quay and the ship. The Khundari looked up at his friend’s approach and smiled wanly. “Looking forward to your first command, Korwin?” he asked diffidently.

“Oh, I suppose so, if I wasn’t so nervous,” Korwin replied in a burst of unusual frankness. “Oh, maybe I shouldn’t say that out loud – aren’t captains supposed to be inscrutable and never show any doubt or weakness?”

Toran gave a genuine laugh at that. “Yes, that’s what they tell you in any command training – never let your people see your doubts or fears. And for good reason, I now realize – you’re words do not inspire great confidence in me, I must confess.”

“Ah, well, maybe this will do a better job of easing your mind, then,” Korwin said. “I know you do not love the water, with some reason.” He had tried to teach the Shadow Warrior how to swim last summer, and it had not gone well. After the wet, angry Dwarf had finally stomped off a wet, frustrated Korwin had had to admit he had a point.

Now, with a flourish, he held out the small blue-wrapped bundle. With a quizzical glance at the taller man, Toran took it. Folding back the cloth he found two bronze armbands, simple but clearly well made. The traditional ancient Oceanian key design was chased in silver around the center of each band, and the hinges and clasps were made of black steel.

“They’re very nice, my friend, but the last thing I need to ease my… concerns… is more weight.”

“Ah, but these are not what they seem,” Korwin said with barely suppressed excitement. “I had our friend Vidalo make these, and in the forging I imbued them with Avikoran Principle, in the form of a spell of buoyancy. Wear these around your biceps while we’re at sea, and even if the ship and all the rest of us go under, you’ll still be bobbing around on the surface like a large, hairy cork.”

Toran looked at the armbands for a moment, too surprised to say anything. Despite Korwin’s penchant for being abrasive and irritating at times, he’d always rather liked the Oceanian. And he had certainly shown his courage and worth in battle in recent months. But such generosity and thoughtfulness was… unexpected, to say the least.

“Thank you, my friend,” he said at last, clasping forearms with the other man. “It’s the most thoughtful gift that, I pray to Gheas, I’ll never have to use!”

“Yes, I hope so too,” Korwin laughed, gratified his gift had gone over well. “I’m sorry there’s no time to test it out before we sail, but even so I hope that it will ease your mind. Vidalo tested it out on young Borin not an hour ago, in the quenching tank at the forge. Worked like a charm, no pun intended, kept the lad afloat and right-side-up – couldn’t even push him under by main strength, he reports.”

This allayed some of Toran’s unvoiced concerns, to be sure. But he was still determined to test it himself… as soon as he could find some suitably shallow water, of course… he certainly wasn’t going to just jump into the sea!

The last surprise of the morning, or so Korwin sincerely hoped, eyeing the frenetic motion of his crew as they prepared to depart, was the breathless arrival of Danir Alvador, the man Vulk and Devrik had saved from vivisection five nights ago. He had a duffel bag over his shoulder and seemed dressed for travel.

“Wait! Wait for me!” The man called out as two men were preparing to draw up the gangplank. At a nod from Korwin they allowed the man to board, and he paused to catch his breath, rubbing absently at his belly. Envisioning the terrible scar that must still be there, hidden by the man’s clothes, Korwin shuddered inwardly. Vulk, stepping down from the poop deck where he, Devrik and Mariala had been watching preparations, looked concerned.

Master Alvador!” he called. “Are you alright? It’s good to see you up and about, but it’s probably too soon for much strenuous exercise. What brings you here so urgently?”

“To put it bluntly, Cantor Vulk, I wish to accompany you, and offer my services to you all as a guilded mercantyler.”

“What? But what about your business? Who will run the chandlery?” Vulk was taken aback by this sudden offer. He had been down each day to check on his patient, given that the local physician was completely out of his depth in such a case. Having mixed Alvador’s blood with one of the remaining undifferentiated Baylorium doses that first morning, he’d finally been able to administer the specific curative just yesterday. Still, he was surprised at how well the man was doing, the miraculous powers of Draik’s elixir not withstanding.

“Oh, my apprentice is well able to take over running the business… as he’s been telling me for several years now,” Alvador chuckled. “And in any case, I don’t think there will be much business on Arapet in the coming years. Even before this tragedy it was a dying place.

“But that aside, I owe you my life, you and your friends. And this is the way I can best begin to pay back that debt. I understand you have a load of strange goods aboard, left by… those things…” His face darkened momentarily at the memory of his torturers, but he quickly shook it off. “I don’t know how much you know of such things, but it will be difficult to sell them on your own… the Guild frowns on its members doing direct business with unguided persons, and the black market is chancey at best.”

Vulk considered the man’s words thoughtfully. His experience overseeing the Fortune’s Favor’s trading voyages meant he was well aware of the prickliness of the Merchant’s Guild – it’s why that ship’s captain was also a member of that organization. There was no denying it would be handy to have a mercantyler aboard to handle the trading, especially one familiar with the Empire… and truth to tell, he’d not been looking forward to handling the matter himself.

But he was concerned about this idea that Alvador had about owing any debt, to Vulk or the others. The man had told anyone who’d listen about his dramatic rescue from the horrific death he’d been in the middle of, and there were all too many eager ears ready to hear his (admittedly quite vivid and well-told) story. His enthusiasm for the Hand of Fortune, along with that of Erala Karvek’s, had gone a long way to fueling the accolades the town had heaped upon them at the big party, and since.

“Well, whatever you’re going to decide, Vulk, it needs to be now,” Korwin growled as he went up the steep stairs to the poop deck. “The tide is moving, and we need to be doing the same. Now!”

Vulk smiled at the mercantyler and gestured toward the rear cabins. “Let’s step into the captain’s cabin and discuss this further, Master Alvador,” he said. The merchant grinned back and hefted his duffel…

A moment later the last ropes were cast off and the ship began to pull away, warped out her berth by two rowed longboats. Despite a few tense moments, once they were far enough out the inexperienced crew of the Wind of Kasira managed to get her out of Arapet harbor without fouling her rigging or running her aground. With the morning sun on the starboard bow and a favorable wind at her back, the sails were hoisted and the ship glided into the future to the fading cheers of the townsfolk gathered on the quay…

The Arapet Horror

As the world of ancient Areth faded around them, and her champions with it, the Hand of Fortune found themselves back within the hollow stone vastness of the Fane of Gheas. But all was not exactly as they’d left it, for the shining face of the Norn hovered above, smiling beatifically down upon the group.

“You have done well, my Children,” he says, her smile growing slightly wry. “And you know the reward for a job well done…”

This elicited a snort of laughter from Devrik and Vulk, Mariala smiled wryly in turn, Korwin just shook his head, and Toran and Erol sighed in resignation. The Norn continued, imperturbable as ever.

“With the natural balance restored, along with the living multiverse, my ability to intervene in the affairs of mortals is fading, once again limited by ancient decree. But that does not mean I may not point my beloved Children in the right direction… especially as it was the recent crisis itself which allowed this problem to come to be. The laws of space, time and causality have bent and fractured under the pressures of annihilation and resurrection… and what was not now is, and should not be.

“But within your Hand you hold the key to set all to rights again, if you will… and so I leave this task to your devices. Fare you well my brave Children.”

With that she slowly faded from sight, his smile, in a flash of golden light, the last thing to vanish…

“Well, that was… enigmatic,” Mariala said in exasperation, after a moment of silence wherein they all considered the cosmic entity’s words. “If whatever it is is so dire, she could have at least given us a clue!”

‘I think she may have, actually,” Toran said . He gestured at the four gateways of the Fane, each floating on their separate stone platforms around them, shimmering pillars of light piercing upward.

“What?” asked Devrik, frowning at each in turn. “I don’t see–“

“It’s the colors,” Toran interrupted excitedly. “In the past, each pillar has shone with a different pale color… now they all shine with the same faint tint of… what would you call that, teal?”

“Don’t ask me,” Vulk shrugged. “They’ve always looked more-or-less the same to me, color-wise.”

“So… we’re thinking that all of the portals are now set to the same destination?” Korwin’s eyes narrowed in thought. “What would happen if you used that key of yours, Toran, to spin the wheel again and bring up four new portals?”

“I suspect that they would all come up the same again, and this same color,” the Khundari replied. “But I’m not willing to risk it, unless the entire group agrees. Clearly, the Norn has pointed us in the direction she feels we need to go, and if we try to test him, for no reason beyond curiosity, we might well lose our opportunity to set right… whatever it is that’s wrong.”

“Yes,” Vulk agreed after a moment’s thought. “She spoke of the renewed restraints on her inability to act directly, and this may have been her one chance to, er, deal under the table, as it were… I don’t think we should risk squandering her gift.”

“If gift it is,” Erol laughed, stroking Grover’s head absently. “I’ve no doubt the job, whatever it proves to be, will be dirty and dangerous — but all the more glory to be gained for us! So let’s stop talking and testing and guessing, and get to work.”

Korwin shrugged acquiescence, clearly outvoted, and the group set to checking their gear before leaving the Fane. They were not as fully prepared as they might have wished. When they’d set out six days ago to investigate some disappearances in Gevdan Town, less than a day after they’d returned from their horrifying encounter with the demonic frog-thing Dol’Gurthog, they’d not expected to be gone more than a few hours. The Chirok Centaurs and the grateful Holbytari folk had provided them with packs and various supplies and provisions, but not all of their usual equipment could be so easily replaced.

“The critical item,” Vulk sighed, “assuming this next jump doesn’t bring us directly home, or close to it, is our supply of Baylorium. Fortunately Draik was able to get our every-other-month supply of fresh potion to us in Zurhan before we left for Gevdan. That was a tenday ago, so what we do have should remain potent for almost two more months.

“Unfortunately, we used some of our supply fighting that damn giant demon-frog, and even more healing up our most seriously injured after the encounter with the insane druid-spirit in Kadara. So what we actually have left works out to… three doses of the undifferentiated base potion and one dose of the activated, specific potion each.

“I suggest you each use a drop of your blood to convert one of your three basic potions into a second dose of your specific potion. It will be three days before it’s fully cured, of course, so better to start preparing now. Also, I have one triple-dose vial of the basic stuff from the previous batch Draik sent us, but it’s near the end of its useful life… if it’s still potent in five days – well, it won’t be.”

Everyone took Vulk’s advice and began the process of creating a second dose of activated Baylorium, after which they took a meal of dried meat and fruit, stale bread, and various junk food items Korwin had liberated from the odd “vending machines” they’d come across on Areth and its various alternates. The packets of small, colorful candy-coated chocolates were the most popular, although the various “chips” ran a close second. Erol was alone in really enjoying the dried banana chips from Areth Ape, and only Korwin seemed to actually like the bitter chocolate of the “Murder Bar” from Counter-Areth.

Eventually they could find no more excuses to delay, and the Hand turned to the shimmering portals of light arrayed around them. As they hefted their packs Korwin looked dubiously at the state of the various stone stairways leading to each portal platform. “Since we think they all go to the same place anyway, I guess it doesn’t matter which one we pick.” And with that he headed for the stairs with the least number of gaps likely to send him plummeting 100 meters to his death.

• • • 

As the shimmering portal winked out behind them the Hand found themselves in the center of a lightly wooded crossroads. It appeared to be early afternoon, with gray, overcast skies and a pleasant, if coolish, temperature. Short and windswept pines were sparsely scatter around them, in rocky, dry soil. The roads themselves were of good stone, well-set and smooth, but the verges were of tufted seagrass and ice plant, rather than proper sward. The air smelled heavily of salt and the sea.

Northward, ahead of them, a road sloped gently downward toward a small seaside town, or large village, the nearer buildings of which were less than 100 meters away. Over the slate and shingle roofs of the mostly one- or two-story buildings the three bare masts of a large sailing ship could be seen and the wide sea beyond, spreading out to the horizon.

To the right a road vanished into the sparse pine woodland. The rising of several plumes of smoke in the distance hinted at further habitation, most likely farmsteads, Vulk guessed. The road behind them wound up into the hilly lands to the south, where the already thin pine trees seems to peter out into stunted scrub and vast tracts of heather. The highest ridges seemed to be of good granite Toran thought.

To their left a road wound up a smaller seaside hill to the west of the town. Atop the rise was set a large and stately-looking manor house, semi-fortified and clearly well-built. A wide tower rose over the roof at the back of the manor, and from between its crenelations Erol spotted a figure, apparently staring down at them through a spyglass or telescope. Before he could react, however, the figure seemed to start, perhaps realizing it had been spotted, and vanished.

“Well, shit,” Korwin said flatly, rubbing the brigde of his nose. “Shit!”

“What’s wrong?” Mariala asked, staring at her friend in surprise. “Do you know where we are?”

“Not precisely, no,” Korwin sighed. “But I can guarantee you that we are somewhere in the Archipelago… that is, the Ocean Empire. This roadway itself is enough to suggest it — nobody else builds roads so well, or wastes them on such obviously minor places — but the architecture of the town, and most especially of that manor house, removes any doubt…. shit!”

‘I’d think you’d be thrilled to be back home,” Devrik observed in some bemusement. “The way you’re always going on about the superior nature of, well, everything in the Empire, I’d’ve guessed you’d be jumping about in joy right now. Why do you seem so… dismayed?”

“It’s… complicated,” Kowrin groaned. “Let’s just say I left the Empire for a reason, and that I’m not thrilled to be back, at least not right now…”

Recognizing this wasn’t the time nor place to press him, his friends backed off, turning the discussion to their next step. “So who do you think lives in the big mansion up on the hill?” Mariala asked.

“That’s the home of the Dominus Legate, I’d imagine,” Korwin answered, grateful for the diversion. “Sort of the governor or Imperial magistrate of the island… I don’t know if it’s a hereditary position on this island or not, that varies around the Empire… but either way they would be the person in authority here.”

“Well that’s were we should start, obviously,” Vulk said. “Go straight to the top, they’re bound to know if there’s a problem.”

“Unless they are the problem,” Erol said dryly. “In my experience you’re more likely to find out what ‘s really going on in a place by mixing with the common people. I say we go down into town first, then visit this Legate afterward, if we need to.

Korwin was all for Erol’s suggestion, on the assumption that if anyone might be aware of his status in the Empire it would be just this sort of administrative functionary. But in the end it was Vulk’s logic, with Mariala’s strong support, that won the day. He smothered a frustrated sigh as they began the half-kilometer hike up the hill to the manor, and simply stuck to the back of the group. Realistically, how likely was it that he’d be recognized after two years, especially in a backwater such as this appeared to be?

The Legate’s Residence, if that was what this really was, was somewhere between a nobleman’s townhouse and a fortified country manor. Perched on a cliff 70 meters above the sea, with commanding views of the town below, it was done in the Koralian Style of two centuries ago, and seemed in good repair, if suspiciously quite. No servants or workers bustled about, the gate to the stables and side court were closed and barred, and no smoke came from any of the building’s several chimneys. Two flights of stone steps led up on either side of a narrow porch to heavy double doors of carved ironwood, upon which Vulk rapped firmly with the foot of his staff.

For several minutes there was no response, despite three more increasingly demanding knocks, the last delivered by Devrik’s gloved fist. They were beginning to fear the place was abandoned, but at last a querulous, muffled voice came from behind the thick doors. “Who is it? Hoag, if that’s you, I’ve told you, I shan’t come down, and you’re certainly not coming in! Now be off! Or I really shall set the dogs on you this time!”

The Hand exchanged bemused looks, and Vulk cleared his throat. “Um, ser, we are not this Hoag you speak of. We are—“

“Oh! You’re not… no, you’re not them, are you? So, are you the ones I saw arriving, in that column of light, down at the crossroads? Have you come in answer to my summons, then? Did the Prince Palatine send you?” The voice grew more animated with this breathless spate of questions.

“We are here to help,” Vulk temporized. “Obviously something serious is going on… if you could let us in, and tell us what troubles you, the sooner we can start setting things to right.”

There was a long moment of silence from behind the doors, but eventually they could hear bolts being drawn and a heavy bar being lifted. The right hand door swung open just wide enough to admit a single person, and the face of a pale, gray-haired man of late middle years peered out at the Hand.

“Come in, come in, don’t dwaddle on the porch,” he said nervously, gesturing them in and stepping aside. As Korwin, the last, squeezed past him the man stuck his head out to scan his foreyard, then quickly shut the door. Before turning to greet his guests he slid home bolts at the top and bottom of the door and lifted a solid-looking bar of ironwood into place across both panels. Torn noted to himself that the bolts, on both doors, looked newly, and somewhat sloppily, installed.

Their host was a slender man with thinning gray hair and watery brown eyes. He hadn’t shaved in several days, and his clothes, while clearly of the best cloth and cut, were rumpled and a bit food-stained. The man had a furtive, hunted look about him as he finally greeted his visitors. He seemed torn between an almost pathetic joy at the possibility of help and a panicky uncertainty that maybe he’d been tricked into letting enemies into his redoubt. Two enormous mastiffs flanked him, and he stroked each massive head, which seemed to reassure him.

“I’m Dominus Legate Peran Charkress,” he said, “supposed governor of this accursed bit of rock in the middle of the ocean, by the command of the Prince Palatine of Chakal.

“And we are the Hand of Fortune,” Vulk replied, bowing in the degree appropriate for a foreign ambassador to an Imperial functionary. “I am Cantor of Kasira Ser Vulk Elida. My companions are the Lady Mariala Teryn, Margrave of Green Tower, Ser Devrik Askalan, Ser Erol Doritar, Toran Quickhand, Shadow Warrior of Düron, and Ser Korwin—“

“Pleased to meet you, Ser,” Korwin interjected before Vulk could finish his name. “You say you’re governor here under the seal of the Prince Palatine of Chakal?’

“Yes, Prince Rapareth posted me here six years ago, after the death of my wife,” the Legate replied, then added as a bitter aside, “Having no living children, I suppose I was the logical choice… for what sane man would wish to bring a family to this isolated, and dangerous, backwater?”

“Dangerous?” Mariala said, puzzled. “It seems a quiet enough spot, from what little we’ve seen. What danger exists, to make it such an undesirable posting?”

“Until recently I would have said the only danger on Arapet was the known one, from the deadly mists off the Fuming Sea,” Charkress said. At the blank looks on several faces he explained. “When the winds shift and blow from the east, if the poisonous vapors for which that sea is infamous chance to be on the waters, then they may reach even this far. When they do, all must remain indoors, for to breath those fumes directly for very long leads to sickness and, often enough, to death. Fortunately, that fatal combination of circumstances happens only once or twice a year, usually. Still, the only reason anyone lives on this miserable rock at all is the iron mine. “

“Iron mine?” Toran asked, his interest piqued. “Iron seems rather a common resource to justify the risk, if these vapors are as dangerous as you suggest.”

“Ah, but it’s not common iron they mine here. Sages believe the lode is star iron, fallen from the sky in ages past when the Demon’s Fist shattered the ancient world. It is almost pure, and once refined and forged, it makes a steel to rival even that of your people, Ser. Indeed, for years the Khundari of Girdyon have been the principal buyer of the Arapet mine’s output, under Imperial charter. They say the Emperor’s own sword is forged of Arapet steel.

“Unfortunately, for the last 20 years that output has been steadily declining, and I fear the lode is close to being exhausted. And once the iron is gone, I doubt the people will linger much longer, between the poisonous air from the Fuming Sea, the thin, barely arable soil, and the mediocre, at best, fisheries hereabout.

“For six years it’s been that worry, along with the the usual troubles of this sort of post… getting the peasants to pay their taxes, adjudicating their petty grievances, making sure they don’t cheat too badly the few ships that stop here … that have occupied me.

“But a scor’night ago something happened… and it all centers around that damn black obelisk in Fisherman’s Square. It just appeared overnight. At first it caused a great stir of fear and consternation amongst the townsfolk, and I sent down two of my Legate’s Guard to examine the object – I’d have gone myself, I was that dashed curious, but I was suffering an attack of gout in my left foot just then.

“As painful as it is, the gout may have saved me… for my guards returned within a few hours, and reported on the nature and appearance of the thing, and the peoples reaction. Both men agreed with the townsfolk that it was most uncanny; they also said that after some time spent near it one began to feel anxious and unnerved. Being men of action, not inclined to introspection or the sharing of feelings, I gauged they must have been unnerved indeed to have even mentioned such effects.

“Yet the next day, when I summoned them, along with the rest of my Guard, to discuss what action should be taken, both men suddenly seemed perfectly unconcerned about the whole affair. They even seemed surprised that I should want to “do” anything to the town’s beloved and long-standing monument!

“Needless to say, both I and my Guard Captain were nonplussed. These were solid men, not given to flights of fancy, nor to ill-conceived jest. Captain Frongar confined them to quarters, and he and I thereafter agreed that the damn obelisk should be destroyed, if that were possible, or at the very least cast into the sea.

“My captain immediately took his remaining four men down into the town to accomplish this task. The gout was somewhat less painful that day, and I managed to hobble up to the tower to watch through my glass. Thus I saw all that transpired.

“My men examined the stone closely for a time, then the captain commandeered a great hammer from the smith and attempted to smash the cursed object. It was a mighty blow, for Frongar was a large and very strong man, but it didn’t so much as chip a flake from the thing. Before he could land a second blow a crowd of angry townsfolk rushed to interpose themselves between my men and the obelisk, demanding they desist in trying to destroy the towns “ancient historical artifact.”

Captain Frongar eventually dispersed them, between threats of the sword and promises not to smash the thing. No amount of persuasion could convince these people that the obelisk had not been there two days ago, not even when a few latecomers to the square agreed and added their voices.

“With the crowd now busy arguing amongst themselves, my men next attempted to pull the pillar down, to drag it to the quay and drown it. But no matter the number of ropes and levers, all five men men could not budge it — it seemed welded to the stones beneath it. Even more strangely, the townsfolk who had defend it against physical attack now did nothing to hinder the effort. They refused to help, when the captain attempted to dragoon some of the stronger men, but seemed otherwise unconcerned.

“Eventually my men returned, frustrated and clearly spooked by the uncanny nature of the stone, and of the strange belief of the townsfolk that it had always been present. And I became thoroughly spooked myself the next day, when I arose somewhat late after a sleepless night, to find that these same five men, including Captain Frongar, now shared the townsfolk’s belief concerning the history of the obelisk. To make matters worse, the first two men affected by the stone had vanished overnight, apparently gone into the town to join… whatever is going on down there.”

“What is going on in the town?” Devrik asked. The Legate jumped, taken momentarily aback by the fire mage’s deep, grating voice, but answered readily enough.

“I don’t know for sure, but every instinct I have is screaming that it is uncanny and dangerous, if not outright evil. Whatever the ultimate goal is, however, I’m certain it centers around that ship now tied up at the quay.”

“Could the obelisk have been brought in on that ship?” Mariala asked. It seemed the obvious, non-supernatural explanation.

“What?” The Legate seemed surprised at the question. “No, of course not! The ship wasn’t… it was… oh, I’m getting all out of order here. Best I finish my tale in the order events unfolded, and then it will be clear… or at least as clear as this murky business is to me.

“After the distressing realization that my entire Guard had fallen under the evil spell of the black obelisk, I quickly closeted my self in my study, at the top of the tower. During the rest of that afternoon my men — my former men, by that point — tried to convince me to come and see the wondrous artifact for myself, as did several of my domestic staff, those who lived in town rather than here at the manor.

“It was all quite unnerving. I dissembled, and assured them I would come when my foot was better… and that evening when Fongar asked if he and his men could return to “examine the obelisk more closely,” I gave my permission readily enough. I had come to fear that they might take me by force, if I did not eventually agree to come willingly onto the town, so I was glad to see them go.

“Once my former guardsmen and the day domestic staff were all gone, I had my major domo, Athel, and the two live-in servants bar the doors. Fearing the defectors might try to regain entry, I had them add the new bolts you see, and completely seal off the other entrances to the manor.”

“So the entire town is now under the spell of this monolith?” Erol asked. He’d been following the Legate’s story intently, as the tale of possession and/or mind control had him rather worried.

“By this time all who remain are enspelled, yes,” Charkress agreed. “But not everyone in the town was immediately affected by this… altering. In the early days, as the strangeness grew, a few came to me for help, but I couldn’t risk letting them in, and sent them on to the outlying farming hamlets, which seem, as yet, unchanged. Most of these refugees seemed to come from the eastern and southern parts of town… those furthest from Fisherman’s Square, I noted. Some had never visited the monolith; others had, but only briefly… the unaffected began to taper off after another two days, however, and eventually stopped.

“The small fishing fleet continues to bring in the catch each day, and the farms continue to supply the town. But the farmers refuse to come in to sell their produce now, rightfully fearful of what is going on. Instead, the town sends out groups to collect their foodstuffs, and seem content to let the farmers remain untouched by… whatever is happening in town. At least for now…

“But the most uncanny part of all this, and the heart of the matter I fear, is that ship. It was about two days after the defection of my guardsmen that the townsfolk began to build the ship you see now at the quay, and that I began to become truly afraid – for this island has no ship-building facilities, and certainly no shipwright! Yet in a matter of days they had laid the keel and begun the process of forming the ribs — these men, and even women, who had previously been entirely innocent of such skills!

“The work proceeded at an alarming pace, and I decided that the Empire must be warned… I don’t know if they intend to take that odious stone with them, or if they have some other way to spread its malign influence, but I knew that I could not let them just sail away. I dispatched my man Athel and the two remaining servants, in my personal ketch to make for Eari, the nearest island to us, there to warn the people of Fethik town and see that the warning came as quickly as possible to Tishton and the ears of the Prince Palatine.

“But not an hour after they set sail, the winds shifted, suddenly and hard, and the mists from the Fuming Sea overtook the island… I was forced to retreat underground, and I have no way of knowing if my poor messengers were overtaken as well and overcome at sea…. but I fear it was so…”

“But how could they possibly build that ship?!” Korwin burst out, forgetting his attempt to remain unobtrusive. “Never mind the skills – I assume whatever possessing force is involved provided that knowledge– but where did they get the materials? I’d wager my life that there’s neither oak nor ironwood on this island, nor any pines or firs tall enough to produce those masts!”

“Indeed, my young friend,” the Legate agreed vehemently. “You’ve struck to the heart of it! Your eye is good, the vessel does seem to made of oak and ironwood, and you are correct, there is no such wood to be found on Arapet. The tallest pine on this island isn’t half the height of that tallest mast, and there are no firs that I’m aware of, of any size.

“They built the ship on the shelving beach east of the town, until it was seaworthy, after which they kedged it to the quay. Unfortunately, my view of the beach is obscured, so I could never see where the timber came from. But once the ship was in its current position, each morning new materials would simply be there on the docks, ready to be used.

“I tried more than once to stay up through the night to see if the material simply appeared, like the cursed obelisk itself, but as far as I could ever tell, they were carried by the townsfolk in the small hours, from the vicinity of Old Hoag’s Tavern.”

Hoag” repeated Vulk. “Isn’t that the name of the man you thought was at your door when we knocked? Who is he?”

“Ha! Wilton Hoag has , for years, run a tavern on the east side of town. Old Hoag’s is quite popular with the heavy drinkers of the island, I believe, especially the miners. The man is well suited to be a barkeep, for he drinks like a fish himself, I’m led to understand – yet now, suddenly, he seems to be the leading man of the town! As far as I can tell from here, he is directing the shipbuilding as well as the rebuilding going on in the town… much daily activity seems centered on his establishment.

“The man himself came to see me, several days after my guards and staff had defected to the town, to try and convince me to come myself and allay my fears of the marvelous obelisk of long history. I refused to open the doors, of course, and Hurndal and Rogast,” he thumped his dogs, whom Brann was curiously sniffing, “went wild at the very sound of his voice – I’ve never seen them like that, and as he persisted in his cajolery I threatened to set the dogs on him. The sound of their growling, snarling and barking seemed to get through to him I suppose, for he departed and hasn’t been back since.

“So now you know the full tale, as far as I can tell it.” The Legate seemed to regain some of what had no doubt been his force of personality before his current plight, and he looked sharply at the strange group. “But how came you here, if not in answer to my call for help? And indeed, how? For there are no Nitaran Vortices on this island, yet I witnessed your arrival not an hour past, out of a column of light…”

“We are… travelers,” Vulk said cautiously, considering how best to convey just how in their wheelhouse this situation was without sounding totally insane, nor mentioning the Star Council. “We have been brought together over the years to… bring balance where it is needed. We have come to accept that we are often guided by fate, to be where we are needed, at just the moment we are needed. Thus the name we have adopted, the Hand of Fortune. Please trust me when I say, if anyone can resolve this problem, it is the six of us.”

“Well, I suppose it makes sense of a sort, you being a Cantor of the Immortal Lady of Luck,” Charkress said slowly. Then he smiled gently, and gave a rueful chuckle. “I was an adherent of Kasira, back in my younger years, before the deaths of my children… and then my wife… perhaps this is Her attempt to guide me back to my lost faith…”

“They say the Immortals are parsimonious in answering our prayers,” Vulk smiled himself. “Perhaps She is killing two birds with one stone here.”

“Perhaps,” the Legate said noncommittally. “But come, take refreshment and tell me how you plan to save the people I am charged to govern and protect.”

•••

Being alone in his mansion, the Legate was forced to serve his guests with his own hand, refusing Erol and Mariala’s offer to help. The repast was modest, consisting of cold meats, dried fruit and a surprisingly robust Kadaran red. As they ate the Hand hammered out a rough plan for learning more of what was actually going on in Arapet Town. To that end, once they had refreshed themselves and Vulk had applied his healing touch to the Legate’s lingering gout, they had all trooped up to the roof of the manor’s tower.

“This was crafted by Usarin Degalith himself, in Avantir,” Charkress said as he handed over his very finely crafted spy glass to Vulk. “My father purchased it from the old master craftsman when I was a child… he always believed it was one of the last Degalith made himself, before he became too infirm and turned over most production work to his apprentices. They still turn out fine glasses, of course, but nothing like the masterpieces he produced at his peak. And he’s been gone, what… twenty years or more now?”

Korwin and Vulk were duly impressed, knowing well the reputation of the Imperial artist and craftsman, and most of the others had at least heard of the fabled inventor, sculptor, builder and painter. Vulk handled the elegant tube of brass, gold and crystal with special care as he turned it on the town below, elbows resting on the stone of the tower’s crenellations.

To all appearances it seemed a normal seaside settlement, a bit too large to properly be called a village, perhaps, but not quite so large as to rightly be called a town, either. It did look rather tidy, Vulk thought, and many of its citizens were engaged in various refurbishment projects, from repairing roofs and whitewashing walls to sweeping and planting of flower boxes… which seemed odd if there was some sort of uncanny mass possession going on. Demons were chaos incarnate, after all…

On the other hand the 30 or more townspeople, men and women both, and a few older children, who were working on outfitting the mystery ship was more than just unusual. They swarmed over the vessel without hesitation or seeming concern as they prepared to hoist into place the first of her three vast canvass sails. Not knowing much abut such things, Vulk handed over the glass to Korwin.

“It seems a well-built ship, from what I can tell,” the water mage said thoughtfully after several minutes. “Design isn’t quite like anything I’ve seen before, but not drastically different, either. But the people… watching them work I’d have said they were all old, experienced hands at the shipwright’s craft— even the children! There’s definitely something uncanny going on with that ship…”

After everyone had a chance to survey the town and the vessel, the Hand and their host returned to the Legate’s study. The next step, they agreed, was to interview some of unaffected refugees currently being given shelter in the surrounding farm hamlets. To that end, Charkress wrote out a brief note of introduction, along with directions for the travelers.

“This might not work for many of the townsfolk,” he explained as he sealed the missive with his signet ring and a blob of hot wax. “But the woman I’m sending you to has her letters, well enough to teach some of the village children at least, or so I’m led to understand.”

Note in hand and supplied as best the Legate could provide, the Hand set out for the closest hamlet, Enab’s Steading. An hour easy walk brought them to the small cluster of six cottages centered around a rustic well. Cleared and planted land spread out around the tiny community, and in the distance smoke rising up from several other points indicated other similar, equally humble farmsteads. A dark-haired, dark-eyed woman, a young girl-child hiding shyly behind her skirts, stepped out of the nearest cottage to greet them, alerted by the barking of several large dogs.

As it turned out this was the very woman they sought, Erala Karvek, and her daughter Varina. She was, indeed, able to read the Legate’s note and invited the mass of strangers, clearly folk of quality, if foreigners, to take seats around the communal yard. Most of the men and boys were apparently out in the fields, and the women and younger children were occupied with the various tasks of a working farm, sparing no more than curious or worried glances at the strange visitors.

“Yes,” she replied to Mariala’s opening question. “M’ husband and son have been… changed… by whatever’s happening in town. Vidalo is t’weaponsmith’s ‘prentice, and was one of t’first to see that cursed stone, the smithy being right on Fisherman’s Square. He’d allowed Borin to go with him t’at morning… t’boy is eight, and fascinated with t’weapons and tools… and t’forge, of course. T’ey both was upset by t’obelisk, when t’ey came home at midday for dinner, I could see it… although Vidalo tried to hide his fear, for t’boy’s sake. But he left him to home when he returned to work, and Borin didn’t argue nor wheedle, as he’d usually have done.

“T’at night both t’boy and m’ husband had nightmares, but Borin’s seemed worse and eventually he asked to sleep with us, a t’ing he’s not done for years now. I t’ink Vidalo was actually glad – he usually grumbles if t’children want to sleep in our bed. Yet when we woke t’next morning, later than usual because of t’tossing and turning, they both seemed fine… by t’time we finished breakfast t’ey were excited to see t’wonderful old stone again!

Vidalo not only let our son go with him again, he pushed me to bring Varina and come see t’marvel for ourselves. When I was doubtful, and asked about his fears of t’night before, he shrugged it off as a bit of undigested halibut… but I t’ink he really didn’t remember how he’d felt t’day before. He twas late for his work, or else he might’ve pushed harder… but he accepted m’ half-promise to maybe come in t’afternoon. But nothing I said could make him to leave Borin with me… and to be sure, t’boy seemed eager to go.

“At dinner t’ey both cajoled ‘n wheedled me to return wit’ t’em, and wit’ even Varina wishing t’ go, I gave in. But as we walked t’rough the town m’ doubt turned t’fear, for now t’ey were both speaking as if t’obelisk had always been in t’square. T’closer we got, t’more m’ dread ‘n fear grew… as more of our neighbors ‘n friends seemed equally sure “t’monument” had always been a part of t’town and our history, and t’at it was not’ing unusual t’ promenade about t’square t’ admire it.”

“I’m sorry,” Mariala interrupted, “but did it seem to you that your husband, or any others you knew well, were… well, possessed by some other entity?”

“Like what t’ey say demons can do? Push a soul right out and take over a body?” The woman frowned in thought. “No… no, I don’t t’ink so. You see, when he were cajolin’ ‘n persuadin’ he used… I don’t know… like, t’little jokes only he and I know, and t’ings from our past. T’wer him, but not him, if you catch my meaning… demons can’t do t’at can t’ey?”

“Not generally, no,” Erol replied with a grim, sardonic smile.

Mariala acknowledged this with a grimace and gestured at Erala to continue. “Please, go on with your tale, madam, I apologize for the interruption.”

“Well, we arrived at t’square, and t’ere it was, bigger ‘en life… I found t’t’ing ‘orrible to look at from t’start — it seemed t’… t’… squirm. I felt more ‘n more fearful looking at it, and after only a few minutes I couldn’t take it no more. I made some excuse, I don’t even remember what, and fled with my daughter. Vidalo called after me, but didn’t follow, t’ank all t’Immortals.

“On the way home I stopped at some friends’ places, and found most in t’same boat as me… husbands, brothers, sons what seemed t’ve changed over night, come t’believe t’ere was nothing uncanny ’bout a great futhering stone appearing where none’d been before! No one knew what to do, t’ough, ‘n I came home, hoping t’would all just go away, and everyt’ing would return to rights.

“But that night Vidalo was firm as ever ‘n his belief t’at t’stone’d always been in t’Fisherman’s Square… he grew angry if I said ot’erwise, and I quickly dropped t’subject. But worse t’an t’anger were the sudden likin’ he had for t’at old drunk Hoag, who runs t’at nasty tavern… goin’ on about what a great man he was, a real leader, ‘n his plans to build a great boat. ‘A boat’ says I. ‘With what? Where? We’ve no timber, no shipyard, and no shipwright.’ But he waved t’all off, saying t’at old Hoag had him a plan.

“T’next morning he pushed again t’at we should come down to t’Square, ‘n again I promised t’come after m’ morning chores. But soon as he ‘n Borin were well off, I went next door to m’ friend Mura, whose own husband was… changed. She’d been dragged down to t’Square as well, t’day before, but had stayed wit’ her husband t’his stall t’help sell t’ t’sudden crowds. When she’d returned home we’d chew’d over on the uncanniness of it all, yet t’at morning she t’were as puzzled as m’ husband at the idea t’stone hadn’t always been t’ere!

“ ‘Why, Erala, whatever do you mean?’ she’d said. ‘The Great Monolith has been our pride for generations!’ I knew t’en I had to take Varina and flee, or we would succumb too, sooner or later. I talked a few of m’ still-unchanged neighbors t’ come with, and t’at afternoon we made our way up t’the Legate’s manor, hoping he might know what were happening, or how to stop it, or at least give us shelter. But he were as afraid as we all, since all but a few of his own people’d fallen under t’spell of t’stone by t’en.

“I’d hoped for more from t’man, but really, wit’ his own soldiers gone over, what could he offer us? He feared t’ey’d come for him, as well, and if we was there… his suggestion of taking refuge in t’farming hamlets and steadings twas a good one, as’t turned out. M’ sister took in me and Varina, and helped find places for t’others, and t’… changed… from town haven’t made no trouble, so far. I suppose t’ey need t’food still, whatever ot’er uncanny t’ings may be going on t’ere…”

Mariala, Vulk and Korwin questioned the woman for a few more minutes, while the others spoke with some of the other women and old men around the farmyard, but being removed from the town for so long there was little else to report. The Hand left Eban’s Steading with the heartfelt prayers of Erala Karvek, that they return her husband and son to her, ringing in their ears. Mariala, looking back, was moved by the sad, dark eyes of the little girl, clutching her mother’s skirts, staring after the retreating strangers, her expression inscrutable.

Back at the crossroads they turned right towards Arapet Town, the late afternoon sun breaking through the scattering clouds at last. The settlement consisted of maybe 50 buildings, most of them homes or homes-and-business combinations, with a smattering of dedicated buildings, such as the small Eldarian temple set on a small rise just south of the center of town. Unlike most such villages, life didn’t seem to center around the small temple square and its public well, however, but rather around a larger open space on the west end of the docks. This is where the mysterious obelisk had appeared (or had always been, depending on who one believed, Vulk thought), and it was here that he, Erol, and Toran headed.

“Be careful, obviously,” Mariala called after them. “Don’t stay too long near the obelisk… I know we’re assuming less than an hour is safe, but let’s not cut it too close. We’ll head down to see if we can get a closer look at that ship. Meet us there in half an hour?”

“At most,” Vulk agreed, and waved confidently as his friends continued straight down what passed as the main street of Arapet, toward the stone quay at the water’s edge and the strange ship. He lead the way through the narrow, but surprisingly clean, streets westward toward their goal. But they were only a few dozen meters into the town when Cherdon launched himself from Vulk’s shoulder and flew back towards the pine woods. He came to light on a high branch, and no amount of mental cajoling or commanding could get him to come back. With a disturbed sigh Vulk accepted the temporary defection, and motioned his companions on to Fisherman’s Square.

The large, cobblestoned area was bounded to the west and south by buildings, and along the southern half of the eastern side; the northeast and north were open to the docks and the bay, with a large public well surprisingly close to the water. And in the center of the square rose the object of their curiosity, the black obelisk of debatable history.

The deep black stone was a little over three meters tall, its four sides tapering towards the top before ending in a pyramidal cap. Its edges seemed worn and rounded, chipped in places, and its surface was not perfectly smooth – as if it had been chiseled with a very large tool, as flint or obsidian might be. Yet it was not made of either of those stones, Toran noted as he peered up at it.

Whatever it was, it seemed almost to absorb light, rather than reflect it, and just beneath its surface he could make out twisting veins of a green so dark as to be almost black themselves. Was it some form of jet, then? But no… no… It disturbed him at an almost unconscious level that he could not identify the material… and he could swear those veins were moving in the corner of his eye… yet when he looked directly at them they were as perfectly static as stone should be. And yet…

Erol also noted the almost subliminal sense of movement in the stone when not being looked at directly, but that bothered him far less than the throbbing hum that wavered just at the edge of his hearing. It had the irritating quality of a gnat buzzing in his ear, but with an undefinable quality of… wrongness… about it. Try as he might, even in his own mind he couldn’t put any better description to the noise than that.

Grover also seemed to hear the sound, for he burrowed deep into Erol’s pack and seemed determined to stay there, no matter how much his human coaxed him. Erol tried to ignore the almost-not-a-sound, trying to focus on examining the mysterious monument, but its alien rhythm put his nerves on edge. And he was beginning to get a headache…

“Can’t you hear that damn whine?” He demanded of Vulk, who was examining the stone on the side opposite Toran, with no apparent sign of hearing anything unusual. “It’s driving me crazy.”

Vulk glanced over at his friend and opened his mouth to reply, then apparently thought better about whatever he’d been going to say. “Um, no, I don’t hear anything,” he said instead. “But I have to admit, I’m feeling… unsettled… and I can’t say exactly why. Is this whine you’re hearing coming from the obelisk?”

“Impossible to be sure… it doesn’t seem directional,” Erol growled, moving around the obelisk, varying his distance. “It’s just seems to be everywhere. Do you hear anything, Toran?”

“Hmmm? Oh, no, no I don’t hear anything,” the Khundari pulled his attention away from his increasingly frustrating attempts to identify the stone. “But I don’t like this thing… it’s very… unsettling.”

Almost unconsciously the three moved away from the standing stone, variously discomfited by its presence, if not quite sure why. In silent mutual agreement they decided it was time to speak with some of the presumably “altered” townsfolk, and why not start with the vendors here in Fisherman’s Square.

The area was certainly large enough to accommodate a dozen or more booths or stalls, but at the moment only three vendors were set up — a butcher, whose shop was actually on the western side of the square, had a large table set up outside, displaying various cuts of meat; the town weapons smith, whose business also stood on the square, to the south, was similarly displaying his offerings on an outdoor table; and lastly an apothecary or alchemist was set up to the north.

The latter’s shop was not on the square, and he had a more elaborate set up than his peers – two tables, one large the other small and round, and a red and white striped awning to shield both himself and his various potions, creams, unguents and powders from the elements. Toran approached him and made a show of examining the wares on display while trying to draw out the thin, gray haired, and rather cadaverous-looking fellow. But the man seemed strangely uninterested in making a sale, and his taciturn expression never changed as he gave his monosyllabic responses. Toran was turning away in frustration, and with a growing sense of unease, when something about one of the potions caught his eye…

Vulk had decided to approach the butcher. He was a tall, heavy-set man of early middle years, as bald as a stone, and although his muscular frame was beginning to run to fat, the temple sorcerer still would not have liked to come to blows with the fellow. As he approached his table the man stepped out from behind it, wiping a very large meat cleaver on his already bloody apron. Vulk was suddenly glad for both the sword at his hip and the staff in his hand.

“Good day to you, Ser,” the butcher spoke as Vulk had barely opened his mouth. “Aye, a gentleman, I see. And you’re from off… aye, I’ve not seen you nor your friends on t’island before. But t’ere’s been no ship t’ port a month or more gone now… how came you good folk t’be here, if’n I may be so bold?” His words were proper enough, but his tone was flat and strangely incurious, his face expressionless.

Vulk hesitated momentarily. Why hadn’t they considered this question before? He’d be inclined to claim his status as a mage and explain that they’d arrived via Nitarn Gate, but the Legate had said there were none on the island. Of course this bruiser might not know that, it was a rather arcane thing for a —

“Ah, you must be t’folk our Lord Charkress sent his men for t’tenday past,” the butcher interrupted Vulk’s thought. “Arrived at the Legate’s own dock, did ye t’en? Have you met our dear Dominus yet? No? Took a wrong turn at his dock, did you? Well, you’ll be meetin’ him soon enough, I warrant, and best of luck to you… t’man’s mad as a hatter!” All of this was delivered in a flat monotone, with barely a pause between thoughts. It made Vulk’s flesh crawl, for some reason.

“Er, yes, we’ve not yet met Legate Charkress,” Vulk played along, since the man seemed happy to provide answers to his own questions. “But why do you say he’s mad?”

A smile, far more creepy than the dead-eyed stare, twisted the man’s lips and Vulk involuntarily took a step back. “Oh, well, he denies our beautiful monument, don’t he? But you’ll see… now if’n you’ll excuse me, tis time t’be closin’ up for t’evening.”

With that the butcher turned and lumbered into his shop, closing the door behind him. It was then that Vulk, turning away, finally got a good look at the various cuts of meat laid out for display. The first thing that caught his attention was the absolute lack of flies, or any other insect or vermin, around the table… and then he realized why…

Erol, at the weapon smith’s table outside the man’s smithy, was having a similar experience. The smith was a man of middle height, well muscled in his upper body, as was natural given his profession… and had the same indifferent affect as the butcher and the alchemist. Erol attempted to engage him in conversation about his weapons, but the man seemed strangely uninterested in either selling his wares or talking about his craft. As Erol moved to pick up a sword the smith suddenly turned on his heel and strode without a word into his shop, closing the door firmly behind him.

Erol barely noticed as he gaped at the weapon in his hand. It was no more than a prop, a toy of tin and wood, painted to look real, at least from a distance. A quick examination of the other items on the table showed that they, too, were fakes. Glancing at the now closed up smithy he realized what had been tugging at the back of his mind ever since he’d approached the place – the forge had been cold. Not smith allowed his forge fires to go out, banking them carefully at night so that they could be easily fanned back to full flame in the morning…

Vulk,” he said, sotto voce as the three men met agin near the obelisk. “The weapons that smith was displaying are all fakes —“

“Yes, and the “meat” the butcher was selling was fake too,” Vulk replied, equally quietly. “It was all just carved and painted wood! What the Void is going on here?”

“A good question,” Toran snorted. “The alchemist was as fake as your two… as far as I could tell his “potions” were just colored water. Why they’re bothering with such flim-flammery I don’t know. But I suggest we discuss it with the others – as far away from this stone as possible.”

All three glanced at the looming obelisk, looking even more alien as it seemed to swallow the setting sunlight rather than be illuminated by it. They turned without another word and headed down to the quay and the mysterious, but perhaps somewhat less uncanny, ship tied up there.

• • •

While the three men had been examining the obelisk and speaking with, or at least at, the local vendors, Mariala, Devrik and Korwin had made their way down to the docks and the quay where the inexplicably built ship was tied up. A wide gangplank was laid across the gap between stone quay and wooden deck, and a large, well-muscled young man, with a very large club, stood guard. He stared blankly at the three friends as they approached, but hefted his weapon suggestively.

“Excuse me,” Mariala said, stopping directly in front of him and looking up into his ox-like face. “We’ve come from the Legate’s and he wishes us to inspect the ship. He’s considered Hoag’s words, and is thinking it might be time for him to come to town himself, but first he wants to know how sea-worthy this vessel is.” She poured every gram of authority and her skill at rhetoric and persuasion into the words.

The guard stared down at her in bovine incomprehension. “I don’t know nuthin’ ’bout that m’lady,” he finally said. He had a surprisingly melodious voice she noted in surprise. “But no one’s allow’d on t’ship ‘cept t’work crews. Old Hoag’s orders.” Behind him a score or more of men, and a few women, could be seen moving purposefully about ship doing nautical-type things, at least as far as a Mariala could tell.

No amount of cajolery or persuasion, nor even Korwin’s bribe of an entire Imperial gold crown, could move the man from his steadfast insistence that they could not board without “Old Hoag’s” permission. Devrik was inclined to just take the fool out and board anyway, but the on-going debate had attracted the attention of several other large, rough-looking men, who gathered at the top of the gangplank to stare impassively down at the strangers. It was perhaps too early to start a war…

Mariala shook her head and asked her friend to stand down with a subtle hand signal at her side. Instead, she tried a different tack, asking the man about the mysterious obelisk in the nearby square. His rather vapid expression took on a beatific cast at this change in subject, and he grew almost animated.

“T’obelisk? Why, ‘tis been here since forever, ma‘am… t’legend says t’was here even before t’town, although t’others say t’were brought here from ‘cross the Western Ocean long ago… by a powerful wizard, m’haps by Talorin Silvereye hisself… t’ough m’ pa don’t hold with t’idea his own self.”

As the man spoke Devrik had an increasingly difficult time controlling Brann. He’d had to keep one hand on the dog’s collar as they’d passed through the town, for the hound had had his hackles up and had been growling aggressively at everyone they’d passed. Now, the longer he spent near the guard, his growling was turning almost to a snarl, his fur bristling all over. He lunged forward suddenly, almost pulling Devrik off his feet, and the fire mage was forced to drag him away by main force. Mariala and Korwin followed his retreat, leaving the guard to stare after them, seemingly as unconcerned as ever.

“What is wrong with that dog?” Mariala demanded once they’d moved far enough from the ship for Devrik to calm the animal. “I’ve never seen Brann act like that, except in a fight.”

“Yes, which I think should tell us something,” Devrik agreed, frowning. “You know, it just occurrs to me… do you notice something missing from this town?”

Mariala looked around, but shook her head in puzzlement. Korwin, however, got a look of sudden enlightenment in his eyes.

“We haven’t seen a single dog since we entered this town,” Devrik stated. “Nor a single cat, for that matter. A town, much less a port town, without animals everywhere? That’s just unheard of…”

“And there are no gulls,” Korwin added, frowning. “No birds of any kind, actually, and that’s really unheard of in a port town! Maybe that explains this feeling of… dread… that’s been creeping over me since we entered this town…”

“I’ve been feeling it too,” Mariala agreed. “I find myself getting anxious, almost… paranoid… but there’s nothing I can quite put my finger on. Devrik, are you sensing anything similar?”

Devrik’s frown deepened as he considered the question. He’d had a subliminal sense of something wrong with the town, true. But now that he’d realized it was the lack of animals that had triggered his subconscious alarms he didn’t feel any particular anxiety.

“Intellectually, of course, I’m concerned,” he said after sharing his observation with the others. “But I don’t feel any real anxiety… or any other sort of emotional reaction. Not the type of existential dread you two are describing, anyway.”

“It must be that circlet of psychic shielding you wear,” Mariala said after a moment’s thought. “It’s strong enough to protect you from my own mind control, as we’ve proved, so it must be protecting you from whatever is going on here as well. Be sure you keep it on, just in case.”

Ha! thought Devrik, I haven’t taken it off since I got it, and I’m sure not going to start now. But he just nodded, and knelt to sooth Brann some more. A moment later they were joined by the rest of the team, and they all moved down the docks to an unpeopled area behind some large crates to compare notes.

“And did you notice that the temperature near the obelisk was significantly lower than elsewhere,” Toran concluded, once everyone had shared their observations. “I don’t think there’s any doubt at this point that whatever is going on in this town is uncanny, and that it centers around that accursed rock.”

“Indeed,” said Mariala. “But what do we do now? Even if destroying the thing were an option, and I’m not sure it is, do we have any idea what the result would be?”

“Well, whatever ideas we might I have on the subject, I suggest we discuss them elsewhere,” Devrik urged. “It’s been half an hour, and from what you all describe, and frankly from the way you all look, I don’t want to test the Legate’s theoretical limit of an hour in that thing’s presence.”

“Agreed,” said Vulk. “I’m feeling a bit less anxious, since we left the square, but the dread is far from gone. The effects seemed absent in the east and southeast parts of town, from what both the Legate and the goodwife told us, so perhaps we should head in that direction.”

“And the tavern that this old Hoag rascal runs is on the eastern edge of town,” Erol added. “It’s the most obvious place to investigate next… and honestly, I could use a beer right now.”

“Or some rum,” Korwin muttered as the group turned to make there way in the gathering twilight to Old Hoag’s Tavern.

•• •• ••

The tavern was a large, somewhat ramshackle building, a single story of stone, timber and plaster, with a sagging cupola perched atop it. A fancy mosaic portraying the traditional image of the beautiful Sea Witch was worn but in good condition, inset amongst the cobbles before the wide semicircle of steps leading to the establishment’s entrance. Erol led the way as the group entered the taproom, Devrik bringing up the rear after tying an unhappy Brann firmly to a horse ring outside.

Perhaps a score of locals were gathered in the lamp-lit gloom of the tavern, in a space that could have held three times that number/ The low murmur of their conversation came to a dead stop as the Hand entered, and all eyes turned to follow the strangers as they made their way to the long u-shaped bar that occupied the center of the room. The only sound was the crackling and popping of wood in the large fireplace on the far wall, behind the bar.

Behind the bar was a tall, very large man with long, greasy black hair and an equally greasy, but massive, beard. Both were shot with streaks of white and concealed much of his round face, with the exception of two piercing gray eyes. He had obviously once been a man of impressive built, but the muscle was now mostly run to fat. As the group approached he set down the rag with which he’d been wiping his hands and moved to greet them. Mariala noted that he moved a bit jerkily and with some stiffness… did he suffer from some serious joint pain?

“Good even gentlemen, lady. What kin I get ye?” Hoag’s voice, slightly muffled by his beard, had the faintest buzz to it… as if a bit of phlegm were caught in his throat and was vibrating as the air of his speech moved past it.

Conversation immediately resumed in the rest of the tavern, the patrons returning to quaffing either beer, from pewter mugs, or some brilliant blue liquid from thick glass goblets. As with the town itself, there was an undefinable air of wrongness about the scene, difficult to put into words.

“I’ll have a pint, barkeep,” Erol said, and was seconded somewhat absently by Toran, who was scanning the crowd in the flickering lamp light. He spotted both the butcher and the weapon smith, each sitting alone at separate tables, nursing beers. The alchemist he spotted at a corner table with another man and a woman, engaged in a seemingly desultory conversation.

“Whisky for me,” Devrik growled, and for once his vocal harmonics didn’t seem to even raise an eyebrow.

“Rum, my good man,” Korwin said, trying to project an air of friendly comradeship, and not noticeably making an impression.

“Wine, please,” Vulk ordered, seating himself on a stool at the bar in front of the barkeep. “A hearty red, if you have it, but something lighter will suffice if not.”

“And I’ll try some of that interesting looking blue cordial,” Mariala said with a pleasant smile for the odious-looking man. “What do you have in the way of food, ser? It’s been a long day, and we could use a–“

“No food,” the man interrupted, turning his indifferent gaze on her. “And t’blue is only for islanders, not for pretty noblewomen, nor any other from off.” He turned to a tapped keg and began expertly pouring off beers into pewter mugs, quickly setting six of them onto the counter. “No whiskey, no rum, and no wine. Just beer. T’at’ll be one ‘n two.”

Vulk and Devrik exchanged annoyed glances, but Erol just shrugged and dropped a silver penny and two coppers onto the bar. He hoisted one of the tankards and took a long drink… a bit thin, and more than a little sour, but the alcohol content seemed decent and he’d certainly drunk worse. From the look on his face as he lifted his own mug, Toran likely couldn’t say the same… but then his people were known for their fine brews.

The others reluctantly took their own mugs, and glanced around. Devrik headed over to the weapon smith and seated himself across from the man, who looked at him as expressionlessly as he had Erol earlier. While the fire mage attempted to draw the smith out with talk of his craft or of weapons in general, several of the others tried to engage other citizens – a number of whom appeared to be miners – in conversation. Vulk and Mariala remained at the bar to question their ill-favored host.

“Are you the Hoag in this establishment’s name?” Vulk asked, taking a pull on his beer and barely managing not to spit it back into the mug. He smiled innocently at the looming barkeep and raised a quizzical brow.

“Aye, I’m Wilton Hoag,” the man replied. He made as if to return to the other end of the bar and whatever conversation he’d been carrying on with his cronies there, but Mariala stayed him with a touch to his sleeve. Even his clothes seemed slightly greasy, and she suppressed a shudder.

“We understand you are the guiding light behind the construction of the ship down at the quay,” she said. “We might be interested in booking passage with you, if she will be sailing soon.”

“Ship’s not for passengers,” Hoag said shortly, although he did turn reluctantly back. “Tis meant for t’trade.”

Vulk cleared his own throat in involuntary sympathetic reaction to the continuing buzz in the barman’s voice. “Ah, trade! Well, that’s very interesting… we ourselves own a trading ship, Fortunes Favor, and would be very interested in discussing the possibilities here. Have you done much trading in the past?”

“T’iron mine tis almost played out,” Hoag responded after a long moment, his strangely immobile gaze fixing more intently on his two interlocutors. Only his eyes seemed to have any life. “Trade’s what we need t’ survive, once t’ore’s gone.”

“What will you trade then, if not the iron ore,” Vulk asked, genuinely curious. “This island doesn’t seem to–” Hoag turned and walked to the far end of the bar, collecting mugs from the men there and refilling them. He did not return to Vulk and Mariala.

“So, what did you sense,” Vulk asked his friend in an undertone, once it was clear Hoag had no intention of resuming their conversation. “I have to admit, I couldn’t get anything off the man.”

“Nor I, really,” Mariala admitted. “I sensed no lies, true… but then I didn’t really sense anything at all. Just a sense of… anticipation, maybe? And I could detect no trace of the T’ara about him, or anywhere in this place…. no spells, no enchantments, no illusions.”

After another hour of attempts to get Hoag, or indeed any of his patrons, to talk about the ship, or the obelisk, or anything of substance, the Hand decided to call it a night. A few of the tavern’s clientele had already departed by the time they stepped back out into the dark, narrow street. A mist was beginning to rise, and the air had become cold and clammy.

As they turned to make their way back to the Legate’s manor they quietly discussed what their next move should be. Erol and Devrik were all for waiting for the townsfolk to load the obelisk on the ship, then commandeering it and dumping the damn thing overboard in the deepest water they could find. Korwin was just persuading them that the six of them, even if five of them actually possessed considerably more nautical expertise than they in fact did, they could never operate a ship of that size, when a sharp hiss came from the mouth of an alley to their right.

The narrow space between the two buildings was a darker pit in the already dark night – Osel had already set and Aranda was only just rising, and not yet above the buildings to the east. As they all turned, out of that void and the thickening fog, stepped an ominous figure. Stooped, cloaked in rags and foul-smelling, the dark figure gestured at them to stop, hissing again and then breaking into crazed giggles.

Once he had their attention, however, he became hesitant, seeming ready to bolt if any move was made towards him. But he appeared to gain confidence when no move was made to accost him, and he began to speak.

“Your’re not T’EM, are you? No, not yet… but you be fools t’go into t’at place!” He gestured back toward Old Hoag’s Tavern.

“Kin’t you hear it? T’bug people, buzz, buzz buzz… got t’whole damn town under t’eir spell… but not old Harald… no, not me!” He began to cackle manically, and for a moment Toran thought he wouldn’t stop. But eventually the man regained control and went on.

“ ‘Spect tis ’cause ’m mostly deef in m’ left ear, since t’damn mule kicked me inna head… but I kin still hear ‘em buzz… kin you hear the buzz? Tis the bugs inside ‘em, yes, buzzing bugs inside! ‘N I know where it is, too… under t’ground… where t’ey take t’people, t’ones who come back… different… buzz, buzz, buzzz!

“Don’t go back in t’ere, fools, or t’ey’ll take you under t’ground and you’ll come back different too… buzz, buzzzz, BUZZZZZ!”

With a crazed laugh Harald turned and vanished again into the shadows of the alley behind him.

“What the Void was that all about?” Vulk exploded after a moment of stunned silence.

• • •

Retreating to a sheltered spot within eyesight of the old tavern, but hidden from the sight of any occupants by the dark and fog, the Hand dissected the ramblings of the strange, half-mad Harald. It was clear enough that they needed to explore Hoag’s establishment much more thoroughly, and without the presence of either the owner or his customers.

Within another hour the last of the tavern’s supposed patrons had exited the building, and it was not long after that the last of lights were extinguished. Another turn of the glass, and Toran was kneeling at the front door, his lock pick tools deftly working its mechanism.

“Odd, this lock is very new,” he whispered to Korwin, crouched down beside him while the rest kept a nervous eye on the street. “And quite sophisticated– Gheas’ balls!” His teeth ground in frustration as one of the picks snapped off, jamming itself into the mechanism. Great, that had been his favorite pick, now he’d never get the cursed lock open, not without —

“Don’t you have a magic key that unlocks any door?” Korwin whispered. “Why don’t you—“

“Yes,” snapped Toran in irritation, quickly suppressed. “Sorry, I just prefer to keep in practice by doing this sort of thing myself. However, in this case…” He pulled the key, on its silver chain, from around his neck and held it up to the lock, muttering the activation word. With a >snick< the door swung open into the darkened taproom.

It didn’t take the Hand long to determine that there were no living quarters in the building, and no Hoag, either. Since they hadn’t seen him leave, and there was no other standard exits, he must have departed through some less obvious egress. It didn’t take them long to find it. In the cellar, accessed from the store room, was an area of uprooted stone flooring and a wide hole into darkness.

Devrik left Brann to guard their retreat as one-by-one the Hand descended the sturdy wooden ladder bolted to one wall of hole, down ten meters… but not into total darkness, as they’d first thought. At the bottom of the shaft the walls of natural stone were covered in a faintly luminescent fungus which gave off a bluish-green light. It was dim, but as their eyes adjusted it was enough to see by.

Still, Vulk felt it best to attempt to invoke the Blessing of Kasira, in case the fungal light should give out… he doubted very much that it would be wise to light any illumination of their own down here. There was an odd resistance as he murmured the words of the ritual, a feeling of wrongness, and for a moment he thought his connection to the Immortal Lady might be blocked… but then the strange pearly light of Her sight filled his eyes, and those of his companions.

They were in a smallish chamber, seemingly naturally carved from the living bedrock under the town, and only one exit — to the southwestward, Toran assured them. Careful to move as silently as possible they set off, alert for any sign of old Hoag or his minions. But the passage was short, and after a sharp turn soon debouched into a larger chamber, irregularly shaped but maybe 12 or 15 meters across, in two levels. They had entered on the larger, lower level, about two meters below the upper floor, and the first thing to catch the eye was the far wall, it’s stony surface covered in crude chalk artwork.

The scenes roughly depicted on the wall included stars and planets and esoteric symbols, interspersed with images of human-looking figures being split in half and giant winged insect-things emerging from the husks. At the center was a sketch of what looked like two obelisk-shapes, with a door between them, insect people on one side, humans on the other. Mariala in particular found the images unsettling to view, and she soon looked away.

So she was the first to really look closely at the stone basin in the center of the room. The large square structure was filled with a greenish fluid, in which lay several human skeletons. At first glance they seemed to be dissolving in the liquid, but as she stepped closer for a better look she realized the truth was far more disturbing.

“By the 37 names of Shala,” she gasped, pulling on Devrik’s arm to drag him closer. “I think that the flesh is actually growing onto those bones!”

Startled, Devrik stared down into the basin, and after a moment it was obvious that, indeed, the tissues were knitting themselves together, attaching to the bones at a visible rate.

“But look,” he hissed, the hairs on the back of his neck standing up. “There are no organs growing inside the skeletons… it’s all just muscle and skin, just the exterior flesh!”

“This is unholy,” Vulk muttered in disgust as they all gathered around the basin, distracted from the artwork on the walls. Murmurs of agreement met this statement, but it wasn’t clear what they should do about it. Mariala attempted to use a spell of understanding to translate the strange glyphs, but all it gained her was a throbbing headache and an almost overwhelming feeling of dread.

Toran, meanwhile, had turned back to stare at the drawings on the wall, his eyes narrowed in thought. “Maybe those scrawls don’t represent bugs, or whatever, coming out of people,” he said finally. “Maybe they’re putting on the human shapes…”

Pulling their attention away from the gruesome, yet horribly mesmerizing, sight of the forming bodies, the others agreed that the pictographs could be interpreted either way. Devrik was all for destroying the obscenities right then and there, but cooler heads prevailed and he agreed it would be foolish until they knew more of the situation they found themselves in.

“But you can burn them to ash on the way out,” Vulk said grimly to his friend as they moved out of the chamber and into another side passage. “With Kasira’s blessing, and mine!”

The passage twisted and turned, widening in places, the patches and streaks of luminescent fungus adding an eerie counterpoint to the Immortal’s miraculous sight. After about 60 meters Toran, in the lead, held up a hand, gesturing for complete silence. Ahead of them a light could be seen between several pillars of stone as the tunnel opened into another chamber… and voices could be heard.

With great care the group moved forward until they could peer through the narrow gap between stalagnates, into the room, where two men stood near a table piled with severed human limbs and a head or two. Neither man seemed to pay the gruesome sight any attention, apparently engrossed in their conversation. The first man was one Korwin recognized from the tavern earlier, a short, dark fellow who had been drinking alone in a corner. The other was taller, older, and Mariala thought him familiar — until she realized it was his movements she recognized. He had the same stilted, jerky way of moving that Hoad had exhibited.

“Ye say you’ll take us beyond t’stars, to a wonderful world we kin’t imagine,” the first man was saying, in a calm, almost dreamy-sounding voice. “But ye don’t say how… and… you look like Jerald, from down the way… and sound like him… sort of… but you’re not him, are ye?”

“You ask too many questions,” replied the second man, and his voice had the same buzzing under-sound as old Hoag’s. “All will be revealed, soon enough. Do you not trust Hoag? Has he not brought prosperity? Just do as we ask, and come along now with me.”

“Yeah, alright.” For all his questions the first man seemed strangely apathetic about what was going on. Yet he persisted. “But t’at’s another t’ing… Hoag… used ta be t’town drunk, pretty much, weren’t he? Now he’s running everyt’ing… now why ain’t I t’ought about t’at before? I don’t–”

He never finished the thought, for his companion had grabbed a large blade from the nearby table and struck off his head in a single powerful sweep. The look on the poor fellow’s face as his head bounced and rolled across the stony floor was as placid as ever, Erol noted, not even a bit of surprise in it.

“You are resistant,” buzzed the remaining man, or whatever he was. “Which is annoying, but also valuable… fortunately, all we need is your brain. Now come along.”

He reached up then and tugged at the back of his neck… his skin split suddenly, and he began to pull it off, his hideous true form wriggling out of the human suit it had worn. It resembled something between a fleshy insect and an animate fungus. It’s head consisted of scores of pyramidal structures, with two elongated antennae-like growths at either side. Bat-like wings stretched out behind and above, as if in pleasure at release from a long confinement. It reached down for the human head it had just severed, picking it up in one of its four crab-like pincers/hands. The thing dropped its human disguise over a lower arm, then grabbed ahold of the decapitated body with a third claw and proceeded to drag the corpse out the chamber’s western exit, stumping along on strange, splayed feet.

For several seconds the Hand sat frozen in place, too horrified but what they had just witnessed to react. What were these creatures? They were not even remotely like anything any of them had ever seen or heard of, and certainly never dreamed of. Even in the horrifying chaos of the demon’s mind, when it had ejected him from his original body, Erol hadn’t felt such disgust as he did now.

“Whatever those things are,” Devrik said at last, his rasping whisper furious, “we cannot let them leave this island!”

“By Kasira, you’re right,” Vulk growled. “Of course! The ship isn’t for “trade” or any such thing – it’s so these vile… things… can spread out across our world. We can’t allow them to get a foothold beyond this island!”

“Nor keep their foothold here,” Erol agreed. “But we have our work cut out for us… how many of them are there? How strong are they? If they’ve… consumed… the whole town, that’s what? 600 people? I assume the Norn would not have sent us against them if we stood no chance, but —“

“I don’t care how many of them there are,”Devrik snarled. “We’ll burn them out like a hornets nest, even if we have to burn the tree down to do it!”

Thinking back to another poor village that had suffered the wrath of Devrik, Mariala looked a little askance at her friend but said nothing as they cautiously made their way into the recently vacated chamber. This was smaller than the first chamber, empty save for the charnel table, a second table covered in various jars and strange implements, and two stone barrels full of offal. A large glowstone lamp, of an odd and unfamiliar design, sat on the second table and gave dim illumination to the area. Its rays glinted feebly off the surface of a dark pool of water along the north wall.

The room had two exits, the western one through which the alien had carried its victim, and an eastern one. From the latter
could faintly be heard what seemed to be whispers, as of a number of people speaking at once. The whispers were unintelligible, the language (or languages) spoken, if any, uncertain. Toran moved silently through the doorway, battle-axe at the ready; Mariala and Korwin followed almost as quietly behind him.

The short corridor opened into another irregularly shaped chamber of about the same size, with three large alcoves. Directly ahead stone shelving led, stair-like, up to a large area where an incongruous rug, of very expensive-looking weave, lay before an alter of sorts, upon which a full human skeleton was laid out. Another pool of dark water filled most of the southern alcove, and some sort of alchemical setup was pumping a blood-like substance into it. That was all Toran had time to take in before his attention was arrested by the source of the whispering…

Three… things, was the only word for them… hovered near each alcove. They looked like nothing so much as columns of rippling, leathery, purple-black flesh, covered in scores of muttering mouths. The mouths varied in size, from child-like to gaping maws that wouldn’t look out of place on a silverback bear, each filled with razor-sharp teeth and spewing forth unintelligible gibberish. Long, almost prehensile tongues flickered in and out of each orifice, almost as if tasting the air. But most disturbing was the inability to see how the creatures actually moved… the lower portion of the thing simply seems to vanish in a shifting play of impossible angles that hurt the eye to even try to make sense of.

A wave of horror and nausea washed over Toran, momentarily freezing him in place. The things had no eyes – Gheas help us, only mouths – yet they seemed to sense the Khunadari’s intrusion into the room, perhaps through those flicking tongues. He had no time to consider the matter, for the nearest one whirled toward him in some way impossible for his eyes to precisely see. Snapping teeth were almost upon him when his highly trained reflexes kicked in, and he swung his battle-axe up in a tremendous blow that cut deep into the monstrous flesh, slicing through several of its mouths. With ululating shrieks from fifty mouths the thing writhed away, then instantly twisted back to a attack anew. Toran rolled under the twisting form, barely avoiding several mouths, with a bellowed “SHIT!”

Unfortunately, this took him deeper into the chamber, and Korwin, following close behind, found himself almost immediately threatened by the second Gibbering Horror. Although he had his cutlass drawn and ready, the water mage was entirely unprepared for the horror that was suddenly upon him, and his defensive swing sliced only air. One of the hideous mouths managed to latch onto his forearm, savaging his flesh and sending his blade clattering to the stone floor. With a scream of pain and horror, Korwin managed to pull his arm from the ripping mouth and roll away before any others could latch on to other of his body parts.

In the doorway Mariala stood monetarily frozen in horror herself at the hideous beings attacking her friends. For an instant her mind was simply blank, unable to process what she was seeing. But as Toran swung his axe around for a second blow, dealing another deep wound to the one he faced, she pulled herself together and began to cast her Fire Nerves spell. Shaken as she was, it was difficult to create the Form properly… but she had to… these abominations must be destroyed!

As she poured Principle into the Form she felt the purity of her rage fuel the spell – the blast of invisible energy that left her hands was stronger than almost any she’d ever delivered before! All three of the horrors shuddered as the spell hit them, and their weirdly harmonic shrieks of pain were so loud they threatened to burst Umantari and Khundari eardrums… but the things didn’t stop. At most the spell seemed to have merely slowed their writhing attacks slightly.

Cursing under her breath, Mraiala was preparing to try again when Devrik, finally realizing that something was going on, appeared at her side. He had heard Toran’s bellow in the other room and rushed in prepared for – anything but what he actually saw. The eye-numbing horror shook him, but like Mariala he felt a surge of rage that such things should even exist. Almost reflexively he summoned the Form to create an Orb of Vorol. Unfortunately, he was perhaps more shaken than he’d realized, and the rage didn’t help… it wasn’t until he’d committed to pouring his Principle into it that he realized the Form was flawed…

He had only a fraction of a second to react. It was already too late to abort, but he couldn’t allow the spell to misfire wildly, not with his friends, especially Mariala, so close! Even as the flames erupted outward from him in every direction he instinctively called on his innate pyrokinetic power to gather them back into himself, channeling the heat through his own body… before the power could cook him from the inside he reached back to grab the hilt of his sword and channeled the energy into the blade. As he pulled it from its sheath the battle-sword burst into flames.

As Mariala unleashed a second blast of searing nerve pain on the alien horrors, Devrik leapt past her to engage the third creature which was now bearing down on her. His flaming blade, almost pulsing with heat and light, came down on the thing’s “head” and split it cleanly in two. The halves writhed and twisted on the floor for a moment, then seemed to turn at some impossible angle and simply vanish.

At the same moment Korwin, having summoned his Frost Blade, plunged it deep into the monstrosity spinning and snapping before him, and ripped upward with all his strength. Like its “brother,” the thing’s halves writhed, twisted, and vanished at some eye-breaking right angle to reality.

Seconds later Toran, dodging and leaping to avoid the slavering mouths, delivered a third powerful blow to his opponent, and the thing finally collapsed to the ground. Like the others it twitched for a moment, then seemed to twist sideways out of this reality. With a great gusted sigh of relief the Dwarf leaned shakily on his battle-axe and looked at his equally shocked-looking friends.

“What in all the Immortals’ cursed Void are we dealing with?! I thought that insect-fungus thing was horrible, but this… this is just… wrong!”

• • •

Meanwhile, Erol had quickly decided that pursuing, capturing, and questioning the vile, murdering insect-creature was their best bet for gaining some intelligence on their enemies. As Vulk and Devrik looked around the chamber where the murder had occurred, Erol took a moment to find that space within himself where time ceased to mean anything. He still couldn’t summon it reliably, but he was definitely getting better at it. He just had to find… yes, there, and with a slight twist… time slowed to molasses for him, and he smiled.

Passing between the two barrels of offal the former gladiator stepped cautiously in to the next chamber. It was about the same size as the previous one, but bare of anything except a single table to the northwest, laden with scrolls, jars, instruments, and another lone glowstone lamp of alien design. No sign of his quarry. On the western wall two closed doors of what looked to be bronze-bound ironwood were separated by a wide stalagnate, and to the east the only other exit was blocked by a mass of thick greenish-gray webbing.

It must have gone through one of those sets of doors, then, Erol thought, but before he could move more than a step or two into the room, a scraping sound from the shadows on the north side of the room brought him to full alertness. As he froze, three shapes moved into the dim light cast by the lamp, and it was at that moment he realized the holy sight granted by Kasira through Vulk had left him at some point. In the shadows he initially thought the creatures were hounds… they were the right size for large hunting dogs, had four legs and a muzzle of sorts… of course they were a bluish-black, with leathery skin instead of fur and an eerie blue light seemed to burn within them, revealed in cracks and seams of the dark skin.

Then the one nearest to him and opened its mouth to howl… and the entire “muzzle” split into four curling triangles of wet flesh, lined with scores of tiny, very sharp-looking teeth and glowing blue slaver drooled out to spatter on the floor. The sound it made was a hideous, high pitched sound, a terrible cross between a wolf’s howl of agony and a human child’s shriek of excruciating pain. Even in Erol’s temporally altered state the thing seemed to move too quickly, and it sprang toward him, hideous mouth agape, the other two close behind.

Moving even faster, Erol hurled his net at the leading beast, and the perfectly timed throw entangled the creatures limbs, bringing it crashing to the ground. Erol muttered the invocation and the net’s magic activated, freezing itself solid and imprisoning the alien hound in its now-immobile folds. The second creature leapt over its comrade, only to take Erol’s trident full in the face – as he tossed it aside one of its mouth flaps ripped off entirely, and it writhed on the ground in pain and fury.

The third hell-hound was close on fellow’s heels, but chose to go low rather than leap. It’s horrifying maw opened to rip out the human’s stomach, but the shaft of Erol’s trident, on the back stroke from having hurled aside the previous beast, took it under the chin and sent it, too, flying ass-over-tea-kettle.

As the first creature struggled to escape the icy net and its pack mates scrambled back to their feet, Erol reached into the pouch at his belt and pulled out a glass sphere. Imbued with the power of the spell Blast of Norinos, the sphere should have send shards of solid light slicing into its targets. But something went wrong, whether an improper original casting, or the strange, alien energy of the caverns. It exploded too soon. The shards of light did indeed strike the hounds, wounding two and incapacitating the third, but several narrowly missed Erol as well, and one sliced a deep gouge into his left shoulder.

Wincing, he hefted his trident, preparing for the next attack – only to find all three beasts suddenly cocooned in glowing bands of sticky webbing. Glancing over his shoulder he grinned and saluted Vulk, still in the room behind him, his staff held at a jaunty angle. The cantor grinned back and started forward, only to stop, eyes widening in surprise.

“Lookout!” Vulk screamed, and aimed his Staff at the fourth hound that was leaping from the shadows for Erol’s throat. The ex-gladiator whirled and crouched, bringing his trident up with a word of power – only to have nothing happen. Fortunately Vulk’s volly of Stavin’s Arrows took the alien hound full in the chest, ripping its hideous flesh apart, interrupting its momentum, and sending it straight onto the tines of the upturned trident.

“Nicely done, my friend,” Erol said, laughing as he wrenched his weapon out of the dead thing’s body. “Now help me dispatch these others you’ve so handily bundled up… and let’s keep an eye out for any others. And speaking of others, where are our others?”

“Um, can you slow down, Erol?” Vulk asked, straining to follow the rush of words from his friend. “You sound like a hyper chipmunk.” Erol paused, letting himself come out of his hyper speed place, and repeated his question at a more normal rate.

“Ah, back in the room on the other side,” Vulk replied, unsheathing his sword and running it through the head (and presumably the brain, but who knew?) of the nearest hound-thing. “We heard Toran shout, and Mariala scream, so Devrik rushed to help. I was about to follow when I saw your situation, and decided I couldn’t leave you alone, not knowing how many of these things there were.”

“Hmmm. Well, I appreciate the assist, Vulk. That last one might have had me, if not for your warning.” He was pretty sure he could’ve handled it, but no point in tell his friend that. “I suppose I’ve lost that bug-man by now… we might as well go make sure the others don’t need our help.”

• • •

On joining the others in the eastern room Vulk was just as glad to have missed the gibbering horrors his friends described. The alien dog-things that had attacked Erol were disturbing enough, as was the human-skin-wearing insect-man; he didn’t need more horrors in his head. A quick search of the room and its alcoves revealed nothing particularly useful. In the largest of the alcoves a still set-up seemed to be being used to create the blue beverage they’d witnessed some people drinking in the tavern earlier that evening, but despite the slight aroma of mint no one was tempted to try it.

The Hand soon moved on to the room where the bodies of the alien hounds still lay on the floor, their blue ichor cooling around them. However strange and disturbing they might be, at least they appeared to be fully in this reality. Whether or not they belonged here was another question.

“And speaking of reality,” Devrik said quietly to Vulk as they examined the table and its strange contents. “Do you feel it? That sense that reality isn’t quite… right?”

“Yes, I feel it,” Vulk replied, equally quietly. “I felt something like it, but not nearly so strongly… or wrongly… in those alternate realities we visited with the Vanguard. And you may have noticed that the holy sight from Kasira has ceased, well before the usual time. I think, wherever we are, it’s not entirely underneath the village of Arapet… but not wholly somewhere else, either.”

Devrik nodded at this confirmation, and then shook his head ruefully. He’d entirely failed to notice that the special dark-defying eyesight Vulk often granted them had vanished. He supposed he’d have noticed if they’d been in full darkness, but still… he just tended to become very focused on his goals, blocking out everything else, that was all. He wasn’t really unobservant.

A few minutes later this view was again challenged when he prepared to open one of the two doors in the western wall, after Toran had determined they were not locked. They had determined that the webs blocking the northern exit were almost impossible to cut, and the strands seemed impervious to flame. The two sets of double doors seemed their only option forward.

“Wait,” Mariala now hissed as he prepared to slowly open the rightmost door. “Listen. Do you hear that?”

He paused, as did all the others, straining to hear. Yes, there were definitely sounds coming from beyond the door… both sets of doors, actually. Ears pressed to cracks, the sound resolved itself into voices – human voices. Screaming in terror, bellowing in rage, pleading for help, pleading for mercy, and some begging for death. Gesturing the others back, Devrik slowly cracked the door, inching it open until he could slip through. Struck by a sudden and almost overpowering premonition, Mariala slipped in behind him, urgently gesturing for the others to follow.

Any sound the group might have made in entering was entirely drowned out by the cacophony of voices crying, screaming, sobbing and bellowing. The heart wrenching pleas washed over Devrik like an ocean breaker, even as the horror in front of him pulled him under like a rip tide. The others stood rooted in shock and disbelieve as well, but it was Devrik who saw red.

The far wall of the kidney-snapped chamber, the largest they’d yet encountered, was lined from floor to ceiling with shelves of some grayish alien metal. On the shelves were a hundred or more canisters of bronze and glass, each one set atop a mechanical device with a small grill at the front… and each one contained a human brain, floating in a greenish fluid that bubbled almost merrily with aeration. That each of those brains was also fully aware was made gut-wrenchingly obvious as the group realized the legion of voices were coming, individually, from the grills attached to the mechanical base of each cylinder.

Three of the insetoid-fungal creatures occupied the room, apparently oblivious to the almost deafening noise of their victims’ cries. Two seemed to be monitoring the various canisters, move about and reading strange symbols that flashed across screens next to each grill and marking them on metallic slates held in one claw. The third was a little apart, bent over a table where the head of the villager they’d seen murdered was set in clamps. The top of the man’s skull had been removed and the hideous creature was just lifting the brain out … a canister, its top off, waited to one side…

Mariala’s horrified gaze was torn away from the gruesome operation by the feral growl that came from Devrik. His face was white with rage, and as she stared at him his expression hardened with descion. She grabbed him by the arm, his muscles as unyielding as steel beneath her hand, and whispered frantically into his ear.

“Devrik, no! We– we might be able to save them! Maybe the– the procedure– can be reversed! Those poor people are still alive! You cannot just —“

“Can… I… Not?” he growled.

He pulled away from her, lifting his arms, hands held slightly apart. This time his rage was utterly cold and fully controlled. The Form was geometric perfection, and when he poured the Principle into it it glowed hot and pure. Between his palms a spark flared and grew into a swirling ball of flame. With a gesture finality he hurled the fireball at the center of the racks of brain-filled canisters, where it exploded with incredible force. His pyrokinetic ability seized the expanding flames and fanned them, spreading them out to either side until he entire wall was engulfed. The fluids in the canisters boiled, the glass shattered, and the entire structure came down in ruin. The voices fell silent.

Devrik had no concern for the alien monsters in the room – there’d be time for them shortly – but Mariala, when she realized the futility of trying to stop her friend, had taken thought for them. She had readied her Fire Nerves spell, and just as Toran and Erol raised cross-bow and longbow she unleashed it. Unfortunately, she was both unnerved by the horror around her and furious with her friend, and she failed to notice the flaw in her Form. The feedback energy washed over her in agonizing pain and flared away from her in all directions. Devrik, Erol and Toran, closest to her, fell to their knees with shocked gasps. But she had managed, in the last instant, to contain most of the wild power within her own body, and her friends suffered only the nimbus of it, and correspondently mild pain.

Vulk stared in shock as four of his friends collapsed suddenly to the floor. Mariala was completely unconscious, but the others seemed only dazed, if in some pain. He rushed forward, dropping to one knee beside Mariala. Devrik staggered back to his feet nearby, clutching the door behind him to steady himself.

“Her Fire Nerves,” he gasped through clenched teeth. “I think it was… a backfire… she took… the worst of it…herself, I think…” Aware that they still had enemies at hand, and no doubt highly enraged ones by now, he tried to pull his battle-sword from its sheath, but his hands seemed not to want to obey him.

Vulk bent his head, laying his hands on Mariala’s head, invoking the healing power of his Immortal Patron… and got nothing. As he’d come to suspect, this place interfered with his connection to Kasira, and his holy powers were crippled, if not entirely blocked. Fortunately, they weren’t the only resource he had to call on, and he surged back to his feet…

Korwin, while concerned at the collapse of his friends, was more focused on the alien monstrosities that Devrik’s fireball had signally failed to kill. The “surgeon” had been caught in the edge of the flames, true, but didn’t seem seriously damaged. The other two had escaped entirely unscathed, and all three were now shrieking what were no doubt foul alien imprecations at the intruders in their nasty buzzing language. The two nearer creature moved with astonishing speed toward the group of humans, with the injured third slower, but not far behind.

Nicely lined up, Korwin thought with a savage grin as he unleashed the Breath of Arandu. A cone of pure arctic cold blasted forth from his outstretched hands to engulf all three of the sprinting aliens. It stopped them in their tracks, and the two in the lead collapsed to the ground, clearly quite dead in an instant. The third, already singed by fire, now enervated with cold, staggered to one knee and scrabbled at its waist for some metallic artifact hung there…

Before it could utilize the device, whatever it was, Vulk rammed his sword clean through the thing’s skull. He’d been able to get close enough thanks to the burns on the creature’s left side which had apparently partially blinded whatever sensory organs it had there. Surprisingly little resistance for a skull, Vulk thought, as he pulled his blade free. Not wishing to use his own clothes, and given that the alien wore none, he was forced to forgo wiping the almost clear ichor off his blade. With a grimace of distaste Vulk decided he’d just carry the weapon unsheathed for the moment…

It took several minutes for Mariala to come around, and a dose of Vulk’s psionic healing touch before she was fully on her feet again. He applied the same healing to Devrik and Korwin, since they were trying to minimize the use of their Baylorium… they were still not home yet… and his prayers remained ineffective. The worst of the wounds and injuries were minimized, although far from eliminated, but their fatigue remained. Still, everyone felt better for his efforts.

Mariala and Devrik managed to avoid one another for a time, until he called her over to the north side of the room. There, in a large alcove, was a pit – who knew how deep? – and it was almost overflowing with the mutilated bodies of dead villagers, all with the tops of their craniums missing. And their brains, of course.

“Look at that, and tell me you really think there was a way to reverse what those creatures did to these poor souls,” he said grimly. “Or to that sorry sod.” He gestured at the nearby table, overturned and singed, with the head still firmly held in its clamps, filmed-over eyes staring blankly at nothing. His brain was nowhere in sight. “What I did was a mercy, and set a terrible wrong as much right as it was possible for us to do.”

“Maybe,” Mariala said after staring into the pit for a time. “And maybe not. But we’ll never know, because you acted precipitously and on pure emotion. You can rationalize it now, after the fact – and you may well be right – but even if we had eventually found that there was no way to return those souls to their bodies, you could have… dispatched… them then. And if there had been a way… I can’t help but think of that basin and the bodies growing in it… but too late now…”

Devrik was silent for a moment in turn. “You’re right,” he finally said. “I did act on… instinct, I’d say, not just impulse… and I still believe it was the right thing to do. If we’d fought those things – and whatever things are yet to come – and failed, not only would we likely be facing the same fate as those lost souls, there would then be no one left to deliver them. Or us. You heard them, begging for death.”

“Yes, some were begging for death,” Mariala sighed. “And some were begging for mercy, and for help. Did you not hear those, as well?” She held up a hand to forestall his response. “I know you are not a wanton killer, Devrik; that you’re a good and decent man, and you feel deeply. I just wish you would think deeply before you react in these situations… you can always unleash a fireball, but you can never take one back.”

Devrik grunted a short laugh. “Ha! Yes, Raven has said something similar to me, more than once. But I don’t know if I can change my basic nature, Mariala.”

“Perhaps not,” Mariala laughed ruefully. “And I can’t do it for you… at least not while you wear that circlet.” She smiled to indicate it was a joke, and Devrik chuckled politely… although he didn’t find it an amusing jest. “But can you at least promise to try? Occasionally? Once in awhile?”

With a diffident shrug Devrik turned back to the rest of the group, and Mariala walked beside him.

• • •

A gate of steel blocked the northeast exit from the brain chamber, and no amount of effort on Toran’s part, not even his reluctant use of his magic key, could open it. In the end, the party decided to continue through the southeastern exit. Almost immediately the path split, the left-hand corridor winding up a flight of shallow steps toward a relatively bright glow just out of sight; the right-hand passage seemed to stay on level, but lead into darkness and silence. The left was the obvious choice, and as the group reached the top of the climb they peered out into a large cavern of new horrors.

Roughly circular in shape, 30 or 40 meters across and 15 meters high, two stalagnates rose up (and dropped down) from the center of the chamber. The pillars and walls were all lined with a pulsating, sickly green fungus, like fine fur, that gave off a nauseating glow. Strips of the stuff criss-crossed the floor, and nestled into the fungus are hundreds, perhaps thousands, of leathery-looking eggs. Each about twice the size of a coconut.

Two particularly large insect-fungus creatures wandered about the room, tending to the nest in some fashion, or perhaps simply guarding it. A third creature, the largest they’d yet seen, sat a t a table or desk in an alcove nearer the tunnel entrance, and Vulk had the odd feeling the creature was writing… reports perhaps?

As the group surveyed this fresh horror and considered its dire meaning, Vulk once again attempted an invocation of his goddess, this time seeking to bring Her luck to their aid. But if anything, his connection to Kasira seemed even more tenuous than before… his silent prayers brought no response. Retreating back down the tunnel a bit, the Hand briefly discussed their options.

“I assume you have no objections to my frying this nest?” Devrik whispered to Mariala.

She grimaced and waved away any suggestion of conflict. “Incinerate them all, with my good will. If those are the eggs of these horrible things we can NOT let even a single one survive.”

“Are you going to going to be able to cast your go-to spell, Mariala?” Toran asked diffidently. His brush with her Fire Nerves had been brief and light, he’d been assured after the fact, but if that had been “light” he never wanted to feel the full effect.

“Stand in back of me, if you’re worried about it,” Mariala snapped. Damn, but this place was getting on her nerves. She was tired, drained and… “freaked out,” as she’d once heard Blue Flame say. But she knew her limits, and she wasn’t at them yet. “Sorry, Toran… but yes, I can control it, I promise.”

And she did more than control it a few minutes later when she launched the Hand’s attack. The energy that flowed from her hands was as strong as any she’d previously channeled, perhaps fueled by her determination to rid the world of these abominations that, as the Norn had said “should not be.” All three of the insect-things went down buzzing and shrieking in pain, at least momentarily…

Devrik’s fireball, following close on Mariala’s opening attack, was also one of the most powerful he’d ever cast, perhaps even more so than the one in the brain chamber. It burst against the pillars in the center of the room, starting a conflagration of burning fungus, eggs, and the two adult aliens who had been in their midst. Hardly recovered from the nerve attack, their buzzing shrieks intensified and then quickly faded to silence as they collapsed into piles of flaming fungus-flesh.

The other creature, who had been at the desk, was also caught by the fire ball, but only the very edge of it. It staggered out of the flames toward them in a towering rage, and a wave of intense horror and almost paralyzing fear swept over the Hand. Only Devrik, with the psychic protection of his Circlet of Peace, was spared the full brunt of the psychic attack. Toran was firing his cross-bow as the wave of terror swept over him and his hands spasmed, sending the bolt wild, to vanish into the flames behind his target.

Erol’s hands also began to shake as pulled back on his longbow… and the bowstring snapped! One end whipped across his right cheek, leaving a bloody furrow, and his shaft clattered to ground a meter away. Then the creature was upon him. Its four claws flailed madly, and at more than one target – the first Erol blocked with his longbow itself, and the second he dodged by a hair’s breadth.

But the third and fourth claws struck at Mariala. She managed to deflect one with her dagger, but the other bit deep into the flesh of her right thigh and she screamed in pain as she staggered back, the leg nearly giving out beneath her. She scrambled away from the enraged alien, holding one hand over the gushing wound.

Devrik moved to her aid, but at that moment a second of the large creatures loomed up on the group’s right, apparently having been in a part of the room hidden from their vantage point. Its clawed attacks were less wild than its fellows, and as usual, the fire mage counterattacked. His battle-sword inflicted a wound to the thing’s analog of a thigh, mirroring Mariala’s wound. He dodged the alien’s second attack, and evaded the third, but the fourth claw caught him a solid blow to the head and he went down, dazed and almost unconscious.

‘Well that’s not good,” Mariala muttered to herself, pausing before she reached the relative safety of the tunnel. The first monstrosity had moved to follow her, but Erol attacked with his freezing net, entangling several of its limbs. Before he could utter the invocation word, however, its own counterattack raked his side, shredding his armor and leaving two deep furrows in his abdomen. Between the on-going psychic assault and the shock of the wound, he went down like a felled tree.

Toran in turn leapt in to defend his fallen friend, and his battle-axe cut easily through the alien flesh, or whatever it was, taking off one of the thing’s claws. It shrieked in pain and fury, and before it could recover Korwin was driving it back with his freshly summoned Frost Blade. Toran used the diversion to drag Erol back toward the tunnel, where Mariala grabbed him. This freed the Khundari to leap back to the fight in time to block the second creature’s attempt to finish off the dazed Devrik .

Toran’s battle-axe was a blur of motion, blocking the enraged alien’s every attack and allowing Vulk to pull the fire mage back toward safety as well. Then, one claw slipped past his defense and tore into the Dwarf’s side, between the pieces of his armor, and burrowed into his flesh, twisting and tearing. Sudden bloodloss and shock sent Toran tumbling onto darkness… the last thing he saw was Grover, leaping over him to land on the alien’s grotesque head…

Vulk saw Toran go down as he fished the vial, identical to the ones they all wore, on its steel chain from around Devriks neck. With a frantic curse he twisted the stopper from the brass-and-crystal vial and poured its contents unceremoniously down his friend’s throat. As the fire mage gasped and choked his way back to full awareness Vulk reached for his sword and prepared to protect Toran… but Korwin was already standing over their fallen friend, holding off the aliens with his shimmering blade of mystic ice. His fury drove them back a few steps, allowing Vulk to grab the Khundari and drag him back to the other wounded.

Erol, having come around on his own, was tossing back a dose of his own activated Baylorium, feeling the healing power surge through his body. He staggered to his feet as a wounded Grover returned to crawl into his pack. He wanted desperately to check on his friend, but seeing Korwin fighting alone he chose to rejoin the fray. And just in time, as one of the alien claws shattered the water mage’s Frost Blade, nearly ripping his hand off in the process.

A woozy Devrik was suddenly at Erol’s side, as he pulled the dazed Korwin back into Mariala’s waiting grasp. But as powerful as activated Baylorium is, it’s not instantaneous, and Devrik was still semi-stunned himself — which perhaps explains why he again counterattacked. This time he was knocked fully unconscious, and if not for a temporally sped-up Erol and a dagger-wielding Mariala he might well have died in that burning cavern.

But his two friends managed to hold off the aliens and pull him back. With everyone now within the tunnel, Vulk used the Staff of Summer to seal the entrance with an ever-thickening mass of glowing, sticky webs. The two aliens tore at them in fury, but even their great strength found it hard going, and the clinging strands soon slowed them to almost a standstill.

This gave the Hand at the breather they needed to get more Baylorium down the most severely injured and rubbed into the worst of the open wounds. Toran’s injuries were by far the most serious, his gut wound deep and, without the magical aid of Draik’s elixir, almost certainly fatal. Even after forcing the Khundari to ingest his activated Baylorium and applying it topically into the wound itself, Vulk found his patient slipping deeper into shock. It was only after an application of his own psionic healing touch that Toran finally began to come around.

While Vulk tended to the critically wounded Dwarf, he was unable to keep any of his other patients down and resting, as they should be. Instead, as soon as his Baylorium had him feeling halfway functional again, Devrik called Korwin to him, and began whispering a plan into his ear. Korwin began to smile and nod… while Mariala and Vulk tended to the wounded Toran, and Erol saw to Grover’s injuries , the two slipped back down the passage.

Stepping up to the semi-translucent plug of webbing with which Vulk had blocked the passageway, Korwin cast his spell of Strands of Lakmira into the chamber beyond, where the flammable strands expanded to fill as much of the space as possible, incidentally ensnaring the two aliens, who had just freed themselves from Vulks webs. The Strands almost instantly burst into flame, and Devrik again focused his pyrokinesis to fan those flames to even greater intensity. The screams of the burning creatures quickly faded away, leaving only the roar of the flames as they utterly sterilized the alien nest.

• • •
With the conflagration burning behind them and all other passages leading to dead-ends, the Hand was forced to reconsider the northern routes, blocked though they were by steel gate and impenetratable webbing. Toran again bent to the task of figuring out the locking mechanism on the gate, with most of his friends in a semicircle behind him – ostensibly to observe, but mainly to avoid looking at the still smoldering rubble of shattered canisters and smashed brains.

Vulk, however, decided to take another try at cutting through the strange greenish-gray webbing that blocked the exit from the anteroom. To his surprise, his blade now cut through the strands as if they were the gossamer they appeared to be. He hacked away for a moment, but after he’d cleared perhaps two feet of the blockage he again found the webs to be like springy steel. Examining his blade for any damage, he noticed the ichor from the creature he’d killed earlier was now cleaned from the metal… and sudden inspiration struck.

He quickly ducked back into the brain room and plunged his sword into one of the alien corpses, coating it again in ichor and ignoring the startled, bemused stares of his friends. Toran was not at all displeased when most of his audience chose to follow the cantor back into the audience chamber… maybe now he could get somewhere with this cursed lock… he was so focused on the seemingly impossible mechanism that it took two tries for Mariala to pull his attention away.

“Forget the lock, Toran,” she said once he looked up at her. “Vulk has discovered that the ichor of these monstrosities on a blade makes any weapon able to slice through the webs blocking the other entrance.”

Toran was divided between annoyance and relief as he whacked the nearest corpse several times with his battles-axe and stalked into the other room just in time to cleave away the last of the blocking strands from the passageway. He led the way up the wide corridor, glaring at the other side of the steel gate as they passed it. Just beyond the gate the way opened out into… something truly strange.

It was an immense cavern, larger by far than the ones they’d just passed through, and made of a dark, almost black stone flecked with embedded crystals of a color so alien the eye almost failed to register it. The closest Toran’s brain could come in trying to make sense of it was a sort of deep ultraviolet… although it was nothing like that. Shying away from the crystals, he noticed the stone walls had veins of dark, dark green just beneath the surface – just like the stone of the obelisk in the town above.

The cave stretched out in either direction into darkness, but almost as disturbing as the crystals was the vast , dark underground sea to their right. Its waves lapped sluggishly at the cavern floor and at the foot of one side of a wide flight of stairs that led up to an opening in the far wall of the cavern. That opening was an enormous porch of dark stone, with two doors of age-blackened ironwood set into the walls at either side. In the center of the space stood an obelisk of black stone, a seeming twin to the one in Fisherman’s Square.

But this obelisk seemed almost alive, somehow… coruscating ribbons of sickly green light arced out from the pillar to the walls of the porch, rising slowly up the column to vanish into the darkness above, like some horrible version of St. Hakir’s Fire seen in the rigging of ships at sea sometimes. The eerie silence of the display was almost as unnerving as the twisting bands of energy themselves.

There was a blurred line of demarcation between the cavern the Hand now stood in and the darker one before them. The eye had a difficult time focusing on that line, seeming to simply slide away from it if one tried to focus too long on the shifting realities of where one stone began and another ended. And standing near that shifting border, the growing sense of “otherness” that had been growing in them all seemed to have reached its peak.

“I think if we step over into that cavern,” Vulk said at last, “we will really be… somewhere else. I have no desire to do so, but I don’t see what choice we have.”

“None at all,” agreed Devrik. “I have no doubt that this the source of the… alien incursion… we face.”

“I think,” said Toran slowly, “that if we can destroy that obelisk, the one in Arapet Town will also be destroyed, or at least made powerless. We can only hope it thereby breaks this unholy connection between our world and… whatever that it is.” He gestured at the dark, glittering cavern and black, alien sea.

There was general agreement on this theory, but a strange reluctance to actually cross over to the other side. Everyone seemed content to consider various plans for bringing down the obelisk without actually getting close to it. But eventually they were forced to take the fateful step… Toran was the first to cross over, and as he did his stomach did a sudden flip-flop. Gravity seemed significantly lighter, the air smelled, even tasted, odd… and in some indefinable way everything felt gut-wrenchingly alien. And alien in a way that none of the alternate realities they’d visited on Areth had.

Once everyone had crossed over, they wasted no time in putting their plan into action. Toran took the enchanted rope and looped it over the monolith, pulling it tight about a third of the way down the column. He had been worried about the ribbons of energy, but they seemed not to affect, nor be affected by, him at all. Once the rope was in place everyone grabbed on, and Korwin generated a sheet of ice across the floor of the porch in front of the stone…

They’d all been worried that their spells might not work in this alien place, and indeed the connection to the T’ara did seem… attenuated. But like this alien place bleeding over into their reality, some part of their native realm seemed to bleed over here as well. Reciprocity seemed a universal trait, thankfully. Korwin had had to focus a bit harder, and the Form took a little longer to build, but the Principle was there, and it flowed into the Form as it always had.

With the porch made as frictionless as possible, the Hand put all their combined strength into toppling the alien monument. The strain was so great that for a moment Toran feared the enchanted rope might actually break before the stone fell. But in the end it was the mortals who were forced to give up. “There is simply no way I can see to move this thing,” he said in frustration. “It’s as melded to this rock as strongly as I am when I use the Joining of Merkünon. And yet I sense no magic about this at all.”

“Nor I,” agreed Mariala. “We’ve cast Detect Magic, we’ve tried counter-spells, we’ve tried destructive spells… nothing seems to work. Either their magic is so alien to ours we can’t recognize it as such, or they’re as technologically bent as some of our friends in the Vanguard. I’m beginning to think Scion or Quanta might have better luck…”

“Well, I know what Scion would say,” Toran replied thoughtfully. “Look for the “power source” if you can’t get through to the target.”

After a brief discussion it was agreed, however reluctantly, that they needed to penetrate beyond those doors, into whatever lay beyond to see if there was some other method of destroying the connection between worlds. The right-hand door was chosen, more-or-less at random, and Toran checked to see if it was locked. It was not, and he easily swing the massive panel, at least three meters tall, inward on its silent hinges.

“I think it’s time to turn on our comms,” Devrik said as they prepared to enter the dim archway reveal. “I know we agreed to converse the batteries, but if ever there was a time to use them, this is it.” They ran a quick comms check, as Scion had taught them, and Mariala used the lull to cast Wallflower on the entire group. With Toran leading the way they entered the alien edifice.

The first room off the porch was four meters square, with a massive hermetic symbol etched into most of the floor. Queer-looking glowstones of a surprisingly pleasant golden glow were set in a circle around the lines of the symbol, which themselves glowed faintly with a sickly green radiance. No one felt the slightest inclination to step on the alien drawing, and they filed one-by-one around it in the narrow space between the glowstones and the wall.

A flight of stairs to the “north” (for want of a better reference in this disturbing place) dropped down to the “west” into a large rectangular area that appeared to be a library… a library someone had ransacked, by the looks of it. But no one had much attention to spare for it, as the stairs, in a sort of square spiral, wound around a pit that opened into a seemingly infinite void of coldly shining stars. They all hugged the wall and continued on down the stairs past the library, now dropping to the “north.” Only to find that as the next flight turned to the “east” they went upward to a landing, then turned south and dropped down agin to lead back to the place they’d started, but which was above them… several of the Hand almost vomited as their minds tried to reconcile the impossible spatial relationships of that staircase.

Perhaps fortunately their attention was quickly drawn away from the disturbing structure (it reminded Mariala very much of a framed drawing she had seen when she first occupied Artemis’ body on old Areth… an Escher, if she recalled correctly). The sound of a voices came from the large chamber to their immediate “north” and trusting to Mariala’s spell of concealment the Hand crept forward to peer into the room.

It was large, about 30 meters across and 12 meters wide, pillars of the black, crystal-flecked stone carved into grotesque shapes around its vaguely oval perimeter. The floor was inlaid with a myriad of arcane, alien symbols around the edges, and in the center was a stylized image of a kind of hideous octopus-humanoid head. Set near the top of the image’s head was a large stone slab, like some ancient alter, and on this stone lay the naked body of a human male. Standing behind the stone was old Hoag himself… except that his human “suit” had been pulled down to reveal the head and upper arms/claws of his true, alien form… Hoag’s human head and flapping arms dangled loose around his chest .

A half dozen villagers were arrayed in a loose semicircle around the near side of the alter. They seemed enthralled by whatever “Hoag” was saying and watched in rapt fascination as he continued with his – Devrik recoiled in horror as he realized the monstrous alien was performing a vivisection. The human was certainly alive, his eyes staring upward in terror as tears rolled down his cheek, yet clearly unable to move. His torso had been opened from sternum to groin, and several of his internal organs had already been removed, laid out neatly next to him on the slab.

Devrik pulled the others back and they retreated out of sight of the grisly ceremony, or lecture, or whatever it was. He laid out his plan quickly and baldly, and the others nodded, paled faced and shaken. Only Mariala hesitated.

Devrik, you can’t just fireball those villagers,” she whispered urgently.”They may be mind controlled, this isn’t like the –“

“Listen to them!” Devrik growled. “They have that same buzzing, clicking, chittering voice as the other’s we’ve seen wearing those thrice-cursed human-suits.”

Indeed, the watchers occasional chants of “Nyarlathoep” and “Shub-Niggurath” had the unmistakable taint of the alien speech. “The chittering gives them away,” Korwin hissed. “They’re just wearing villagers’ skins… and if you chitter, you die!”

Mariala was forced to agree, and the group quickly split to carry out Devrik’s plan. He, Vulk and Erol quickly returned to the porch and re-entered the ancient temple by the right-hand door, making their way into a comparable position as Toran, Mariala and Korwin on the left. The false-Hoag was just reaching once more into his victim’s body when Devrik activated the comms’ countdown feature… from five, and at one they all attacked.

Mariala’s Fire Nerves, if not her strongest channeling, was strong enough — both false-Hoag and his audience staggered as the pain racked whatever passed for a nervous system in their alien bodies. Before they’d had time to fully register the attack, Devrik’s Orb of Vorol landed in the middle of the spectators, exploding outward to engulf four of the creatures… but only four. He had cast if specifically to keep the flames from reaching the altar, the poor bastard of a human, and the alien vivisectionist.

The burning “villagers” shrieked and clawed at their human skins, attempting to escape the immolating flames, but only one succeeded in shedding their flesh disguise in time. As it staggered free in its native form half a dozen needles of razor-sharp ice pierced its torso, shredding it in a spray of greenish-clear ichor and fungus-flesh. Korwin grinned in savage satisfaction.

Erol, again in his extratemporal mental space, sent arrows speeding into the two pseudo-villagers who’d managed to avoid the fireball. The first shaft took the one disguised as the local laundress straight through the skull, dropping “her” instantly, and the second shaft tore through the thigh of the “wife” of the baker, severing whatever passed for a femoral artery in the creature. It went down and in less than a minute the alien had ichored out.

The alien who had worn the body of old Hoag seemed momentarily stunned at the sudden, overwhelming attack, and that pause was all Toran needed. His cross-bow bolt took the creature full in the chest, and it toppled over backwards without a sound. Slinging his cross-bow, Toran unlimbered his axe and strode out to dispatch any of the aliens that might be not quite dead, a task Erol was also engaged in. Toran severed the head of the still-twitching, feebly chittering “Hoag,” and then the only sound was the slowing dying crackle of the flames consuming the faux townspeople.

Vulk, we have to save this man,” Devrik said urgently, dragging his friend over to the stone slab of the foul alter. “I know you can do it!”

The cantor stared in horror at the naked man, whose eyes seeming to plead through his tears. His entrails were dropped over the side of the great incision down his torso, and his liver, spleen and one kidney were laid out beside him.

Devrik, I can’t — look at this, the damage, it’s just — it’s too much!” Vulk shook his head in desperate negation at the gruesome sight.

“Bullshit!” Devrik barked. “For the love of the gods, Vulk, you resurrected a man once! This can’t be more difficult than that, surely — especially with Baylorium!”

“It’s — oh, damnit, you don’t understand! It’s far more — Devrik, I don’t have any idea how all this goes back together!” Vulk pulled his friend away from the alter and lowered his voice. “ Do you not remember the horror of Ser Andro’s revival? He suffered another painful death from poison in seconds; this could be ten times more terrible than that! This poor man could die a lingering, excruciating death over days if I don’t get everything put back properly.”

Vulk, I couldn’t save all those people in the the brain tubes, only avenge them, and free them to the mercy of death. But you have a chance to save at least this one person. Please Vulk, you have to try!” Devrik actually saying please shook Vulk out of his inward spiral into panic, and he stared at his old friend in surprise.

“Godsdamnit!” he growled, turning back to the eviserated man. “Bring me all the undifferentiated Baylorium we have. And get as many of those glowstones over here as you can…”

• • •

It took almost an hour, but eventually Vulk managed to get the poor villager’s guts returned to his insides in what he devotedly prayed was the correct order and placement. Not that his prayers had any efficacy in this accursed place – he was truly cut off from Kasira here. He had been forced to rely strictly on his inborn psionic healing ability, and the power of Draik’s Baylorium. Never before had he delved so deeply into the microscopic realm of the human body, and if nothing else it had been a revelation… he had coaxed blood vessels to reconnect, cells to divide and multiply, and had even destroyed a clump of dark, strange looking cells in the man’s lung that had looked — wrong, somehow.

He’d also used a significant portion of the Hand’s remaining undifferentiated Baylorium, starring with his oldest three-unit vial. If they didn’t return home soon, some or all of them might yet suffer for this good deed. Still, Devrik had been right to push for this, he had to admit. It had been the moral thing to do, and as exhausted as he felt right now, he also felt elated. If the Baylorium could keep infection at bay for a few days, and he really had connected everything correctly, then there would be time to use one of few remaining undifferentiated elixirs to make one specific to his patient, and the man’s survival would be assured.

Devrik and Erol contrived to make a sling-stretcher to carry the now sleeping man out on. Whatever the alien monsters had used to keep him awake and block his pain receptors had lasted through most of the restorative surgery. Only as he was stiching the man up had he begun to feel pain, forcing Vulk to administer one of his own anesthetics. Now the fellow rested comfortably, in a deep sleep.

“We think we may have a way to destroy that monolith,” Toran said as Vulk slid down the wall next to him outside the temple, or whatever this hideous place was (Vulk still couldn’t get the image of the immense octopus-headed humanoid statue that he’d finally seen in the great alcove opposite the alter out of his mind). His friend handed him a flask, and he downed a swig without question. Good Khundari whiskey, and it burned going down, but served to revive him a bit.

“Yes?” he gasped around the drink, passing back the flask. “How are we going to do that?”

“With this,” Toran held up the small black stone-like object he’d been using to summon the portal to the Fane of Gheas. The “remote control,” as Chilz had called it when they’d explained the whole story to the Vanguard.

“We’ve been discussing it while you were saving that poor sod, and we think that if I summon the portal on top of the obelisk, the resultant dimensional resonance feedback should destroy the stone and sever the connection between its dimension and ours.”

“Dimensional resonance feedback?” Vulk repeated, raising an eyebrow.

The Dwarf shrugged. “I picked up some stuff from Quanta, what can I say. In any case, we’re going to try it.”

“What will it do to the Fane of Gheas, though?” Vulk asked. He was too tired to think this through properly. “And to us, if we’re still in this… dimension, universe, whatever?”

“Well, as to the Fane, we’re not sure. Probably nothing, but there’s a small chance it might destroy that as well as the obelisk. It’s a chance I’m willing to take… my people have lived without access to the Fane for centuries, thinking it a myth. If it’s truly lost now… well, what’s the difference?

“As for us… we have no intention of being on this side of that line,” he pointed at the blurry, shifting demarcation between this cavern and the one in their world. “I’m the only one who has to stay, and only long enough to summon the portal. It’s a short dash, and I assure you I plan to make it back before the connection is destroyed. Assuming we’re right, of course.”

Devrik, Erol and Korwin returned from their search of the ancient, alien structure, and declared it currently empty of enemies. “Although there seem to be numerous other… gateways… in there,” Korwin said, with a shudder. “Leading to some very… disturbing places… I, for one, am ready to get out of here!”

Once everyone was back in the cave which was presumably actually underneath the town of Arapet, Devrik and Erol carrying the injured villager between them, Toran stood at the absolute edge of the range within which he could summon a portal. He glanced back at his friends. Maybe five meters… and he was fast. He turned back to the black obelisk, the green fire still running up its flanks in eerie waves, took a deep breath… and pressed the button in the proper sequence.

With a roar, the white pillar of light, with its core of faint, shifting pastel colors appeared in the same space occupied by the black pillar. Toran just had time to note, with some satisfaction, that he’d centered it almost perfectly before he was dashing for the line. There was an ear-piercing shriek of tortured metal and stone, and the ground beneath him heaved, hurling him forward. He hit the ground and rolled as a blinding flash of light, of an indescribable color, seared through his closed eyes. Then there was darkness and silence.

Toran, are you alright?” Mariala’s urgent voice came from above, and he opened one eye to see her peering down at him in concern. The roof of the cavern over her head looked like good Novendian limestone… he turned to look behind him. Less than a meter away a wall of the same stone rose up where previously there had been an alien cavern and sea. And more importantly, the almost subliminal sense of “wrongness” that had plagued him, plagued them all, since their arrival on Arapet Island was gone.

“I think we’re really home now,” he said, climbing to his feet and dusting himself off. “I never thought I’d say this, but… let’s get the Void out of these caves! The sun should be coming up soon, and I think we could all use the sight – and some fresh air.”

The Fane of Gheas

A good meal and a good night’s sleep proved to be just what the Hand needed. Departing Zurhan at the last turn of the Phoenix watch, they rode a steady, sustainable pace of walk-and-canter that brought them to the gates of Kar Gevdan at the middle of the Unicorn watch, just after noon. Leaving the castle’s groomsmen to see to the care and stabling of their horses, most of the friends made their way quickly up to the Baron’s study where, his seneschal informed them, a light lunch had been laid out for them.

Devrik, however, made a beeline for the rooms set aside for his family, and an intense, if briefer than either would have liked, reunion with Raven. Afterward (and following the few minutes he allowed himself to play with his son) Devrik made his own way to his uncle’s study. He arrived just as the others were finishing their meal and preparing to get to work.

Lord Tynal recounted what little he knew, all of which turned out to be secondhand, gathered from the reports of his Captain of the City Guard– strange goings-on in the town below the castle, with strange animals appearing in the streets, rumors of ghosts and the walking dead, and several people mysteriously vanished. The only new intelligence concerned a suspicions shipping concern that might possibly be involved in moving the victims of the Darikazi slavers. Their ships and warehouse were in the Eastport Docks district, to the east of the castle and High Town, while the mysterious events, and supposed Darikazi base of operations, were both in the western Low Town.

It was decided that Haplo and the Guard captain would investigate Sheltam & Sons Shipping, while the bulk of the Hand would look into the more uncanny events in Low Town. At the fourth turn of the Wolf watch they set out on their various tasks, with the Baron’s blessing and good wishes.

Wending their way down the steep, narrow Rockfoot Lane from the High Town, headed for the Farmer’s Market, the larger group decided to split into three and approach from different streets, so as not to appear too overwhelming or intimidating a group. Mariala, Erol and young Jeb took the northern approach, whilst Toran and Korwin assayed the central passage, and Vulk, Devrik and Therok claimed the southern route.

 

The Low Town of Gevdan lay between two arms of of blue-black basalt to the east and the west. The western arm was lower, no more than 20 meters high in most places, while the eastern arm was both larger and higher – atop it’s 60 meter headland sat the castle, one wall and tower of which extended into the district. The area was dominated, however, by the great pinnacle of stone that rose up more than 40 meters from its heart . Upon its peak stood a circular tower of grey-white granite topped by crenelations and a great beacon, lit day and night by an oil-fed bonfire and a reflecting mirror of polished bronze.

The Farmer’s Market occupied a large area at the NE foot of the Lighthouse Rock, and should have been a bustling place on a springtime morning, Mariala thought. But today several booths stood empty, and the crowd was thin and nervous. Taking the lead, she set about putting the booth merchants at ease before bringing up the strange events of recent days. Most of the vendors appeared sullen and fearful, unwilling to talk. But eventually a baker proved not only willing, but downright voluble – Virnok was not shy in his complaints of the recent uncanny occurrences in the district.

“It’s bad enough that wild beasts and such have come into the town – why, two of the City Guard killed a great silver-back bear just a few days ago, not two streets from here (and didn’t they have a time of it, the creature near killed them before they managed to bring it down) – but now dark specters are prowling the streets and upsetting decent folk!”

“Specters?” Mariala asked. “Do you mean–”

“Specters I said and specters I meant!” the man continued obstinately, as if she’d been about to contradict him. “Dark specters! My own dear wife saw one just last night, and it near frightened her straight into her own grave! When a gods-loving woman can’t even get up at night to use the chamber pot without being terrorized by haunts and whatnot, well, I don’t know what things are coming to!”

“Um, yes… now, your wife–” Mariala tried to interject.

Esmalda, a gem of a woman and a great helpmeet to me, I can tell you. She’d be here now, of course, she always is, but she was that upset by the specter. She left not a turn of the glass past, daren’t stay out now the sun is getting low!” The baker plowed on, warming to a new theme. “At least she had the heart to open with me – not like some of these jelly-knees who won’t even open their booths the last couple days. Why, all the standards have just gone to shite these days, if you’ll pardon my Khundari, and don’t get me started on the young folks–”

Mariala managed to stem this flow after a minute, and drew him back to the matter of the specter. “Well, I didn’t see it myself, of course… it had vanished by the time I’d leapt out of bed at Esmalda’s shriek – gods, that woman can scream – but she described it clear enough, once her heart stopped pounding so.

“All glowing green and transparent, she said it was… a gaunt, bearded fellow with a great helm on his head and armor beneath tattered robes. No, no, not anyone she recognized – who would she know who went around in such ironmongery in life? Probably some knight or warrior-cantor whose ashes were laid to rest beneath the temple in the old days, I should think.”

Erol was at first inclined to dismiss the man’s story, or rather the wife’s, as no more than a bit of undigested beef, but further questioning of other vendors revealed similar stories of a similar spectral figure, seen in the last tenday or so. Some said that it was a Khundari knight, others a great human warrior, although no one actually claimed to recognize it.

Several people also claimed to have seen actual walking corpses, however, and those were sometimes recognized. “Why ’twere the very corpse of that Nedor Felkin, ‘im what was killed last month by that run-away cart down to the docks!” one old woman told them breathlessly. “I saw ‘im clear as I’m seeing you, milady, from my bedroom window, when I ‘eard that poor young girl screamin’. I yelt at ‘im to let ‘er be and go back to the undertaker’s for proper burning! But he paid me no heed, and dragged ‘er into the dark, right from in front of the temple doors! ‘Twasn’t right, even if the lass was no better ‘en she should be!”

♦ ♦ ♦ 

Meanwhile, at the small park on the south edge of the market square Toran and Korwin were questioning a pig butcher and a barber who plied their respective trades there. After some general remarks about the weather and the chances of the fishing fleet having a decent catch today, it soon came out that the victim the old woman mentioned was not the only person to go missing in recent days. At least seven others had been reported by friends or neighbors to have vanished in the night over the last half tenday or so.

“I think the first one I can recall ‘earing about,” the ruddy-faced butcher said, frowning in thought when pressed on the matter,” was that n’er-do-well Bektram the Khundari. Er, meanin’ no offense to your lordship, of course…”

“None taken,” Toran replied with a dry smile.

The butcher coughed in embarrassment before continuing, “Ee does odd jobs ’round the town… mainly ‘ere in Low Town… and mostly bad repairs on metal-work, If’m honest. A surly fellow, and none to popular, yet underfoot all too often – though I can’t recall a sight of ‘im in the last tenday.”

“Well I saw him the day before the earthquake,” the barber offered. He was a tall, slender man with a surprisingly refined manner, in sharp contrast to the bluff, stocky butcher. “It was in the temple side yard. He was talking to that scruffy young fellow… I can’t remember his name… the one who’s always hanging about with one or another of those stand-offish foreigners. Anyway, the two seemed quite intent about something, until Bektram noticed me watching and dragged the boy off.”

The barber thought that the troubles in town had begun not too long after the earthquake… definitely by Saridás, though. “I hadn’t really thought about it before,” the barber said thoughtfully, “but now I wonder if that earthquake itself wasn’t the first of the troubles?”

“No, no,” the butcher disagreed, in that dismissive way only old friends can pull off. “I’m certain I first ‘eard about a missing ‘lura a day or two before the ‘quake… that blond-haired boy, it was; and old Randorf said he saw that ghost of ‘is before that.”

“I think not, you country bumpkin,” the barber disagreed amiably. “I was there when Randorf told you about seeing the spectral warrior, and it was two days after the earthquake at least…”

Korwin and Toran slipped quietly away as the two men fell into what was obviously an old and comfortable pattern of bickering. They joined Mariala and Erol, who were just passing on the street to the west of the park, and headed south toward the smaller Fishermen’s Market near the docks where they could see Devrik, Vulk and Therok.

♦ ♦ ♦ 

Those three worthies had found the Fishermen’s Market to be even more anemically attended than its larger neighbor to the north. Part of that may simply have been that the fishing fleet was still out on the bay plying their trade, but the few vendors and patrons present seemed just as nervous and skittish as everyone else in the district. The first person they struck up a conversation with was the local ratter, a lucky break as he quickly proved very informative. He seemed rather an upbeat fellow, considering his profession, and he set down his wheelbarrow full of rodent corpses amiably enough when Vulk hailed him.

“It’s just as well her Ladyship isn’t here,” Therok muttered to Devrik as they peered at the pile of dead rats. The fire-mage grunted an amused agreement, while keeping a watchful eye on Brann and the ratter’s little terrier. The two dogs were circling one another and sniffing butts, and after a moment fell to playing, despite the size difference.

“So, how is business my good man?” Vulk asked heartily, leaning on his staff in a way he hoped was friendly and conversational. The man eyed his cantor’s colors a bit bemusedly, but seemed willing enough to talk, once he saw his dog was in no danger from the gentlemen’s hound.

“Well, your worship, it’s been a right windfall, truth be told, this tenday past. Or so I’d’ve said before yesterday… now I’m ‘avin’ me doubts.”

“Really? That looks like a, um, good haul,” Vulk offered, waving a hand at the man’s wheelbarrow. “Why are you having doubts?”

“Well, ser, ’cause of this!” The man reached into the pile of corpses and pulled out the body of an enormous rat. As he held it up by its tail for a proper viewing, Devrik could see that it was easily three times the size of any rat he’d ever seen. Vulk was less impressed, having once encountered the giant rats of the deep sewers of Tekolo, in the Theocracy of the Faith… but he had to allow that it was a rodent of unusual size.

“I figure the ‘quake musta shook up the usual beasties,” the ratter went on. “For awhile afterward it was a boom business, let me tell ya! But then the big ‘uns started showing up… which was fine, I suppose… they was a bit ‘arder to kill, but worth the effort. But when some buggers showed up four times bigger than this–” he raised the giant rat corpse a little higher, shaking  it for emphasis… and gave a shout of surprise and dismay when Cherdon swooped down and snatched it from his hand. Over his angry shouts the raptor soared back up to the nearest rooftop to devour his meal.

“Did you blokes see that?!” the ratter demanded of his visitors, his outrage momentarily overcoming any class consciousness. “That bloody ‘awk just stole m’ rat!”

“Er, yes,” Vulk agreed, looking blankly innocent. “Well, birds… what are you going to do? Shameless scavengers, the lot of them!” Devrik disguised his snort of laughter with a sudden cough, while Therok didn’t even try to hide his grin. “So, you were saying about these even larger rats…?”

With a disgruntled sigh, the ratter resigned himself to the loss of his rat, and continued on with his tale of rodents the size of the gentlemen’s hound. “One of ’em almost took off me ‘and last night!” he said, showing the still red welts and punctures on said appendage. Between monstrous rats, silver-back bears, and all the missing ‘luras and other night folk, it was getting too dangerous to be out after sunset, he was beginning to think…

“Last night ’twas the last straw, I’m thinking. Once I turn in the bounties for this lot,” he kicked the wheelbarrow, “I think I’ll take a few nights off…”

“Probably a good idea,” Devrik agreed. “Before you do though, could you recommend an inn or tavern nearby where a man might quench his thirst?”

“Oh, aye, you’re not far from the best place for beer on the docks, though it might be, er, a bit rustic for your lordships…” his gazed flicked to Vulk in particular. “It’s the Brass Kraken, just along the High Street there. You can’t miss it, there’s a big kraken, made ‘o brass, o’er the door…”

The three men thanked the man and made their farewells to him and his dog, Brann only reluctantly being pulled away from his new friend. As they walked up the street they paused as the rest of the Hand emerged from a northern cross street and joined them. They, too, had been directed to the Brass Kraken as the best establishment they were likely to find in Low Town, and the party repaired thence to compare notes and quench the thirst that such intense sleuthing had given them all.

The tap room of the inn was not empty, but was not nearly as full as might be expected given the afternoon hour, Devrik thought. Despite this, the service was somewhat slow, as only the proprietor and one young woman, presumably his daughter, seemed to be working. After an hour and three rounds of drinks, the debate on their next actions had degenerated into a scientific discussion on the relative merits of troll farts vs. troll belches as the primary cause of earthquakes, and whether or not Nitaran Gates required sentience to function.

Devrik, while firmly in the ‘uncertain’ column on the issue of subterranean humanoid bodily gasses and their possible relationship to earth movements, was able to definitively state that the Gates did sometimes activate spontaneously, and that people and animals were well known to pass through them, sometimes quite unknowingly. Mariala and Vulk were able to confirm this, so Vulk’s idea that the earthquake, whatever it’s ultimate cause, could not be ruled out as having triggered random Gate openings and therefore the recent flood of strange visitors.

But even if that were true, it didn’t explain the rash of ghost sightings, the walking dead, or the disappearance of seven or more of the Baron’s subjects, however lowly. Given the profession of many of the missing persons, Toran asked their host about local brothels, which brought a diffident suggestion that the gentleman might enjoy the delights of the Sow’s Silk Purse, just two streets over. A moment of confusion ensued before the man was made to understand that they were interested in the missing alura, at which point he was suddenly more congenial.

“Oh, I do beg your pardon, Ser,” he said, laying down the fourth round of drinks, a pile of wooden bowls and spoons, and the large ceramic pot of beef-and-onion stew Mariala had order in a probably futile effort to soak up some of the alcohol.

“I completely misunderstood your interest… but it wouldn’t do you any good, then, you see. The lads and lasses who sell their, er… that is, work freelance, as it were, ply their trade up in the temple side yard, as tradition dictates. So none of the proper houses of good repute would be like to know anything about them, I’m afraid.

“And my apologies again, gentlemen, lady, for the slow service this afternoon. I’ve been short-handed this six months past, ever since my tap-boy ran off to take up with those foreigners. Now Kemis was no great shakes, and I had sometimes wondered if he was worth half the trouble he caused… but he did know how to keep the beer flowing, a virtue I didn’t perhaps appreciate until it was gone, as the saying goes. With the disruption of the war I could never replace him, and now half my servers are afraid to come in, thanks to all these uncanny goings-on, well…” He shrugged apologetically and began gathering up the empty tankards and mugs.

“What’s this about foreigners?” Korwin asked sharply, grabbing the man’s sleeve to stay him. The barber had said something about foreigners too, but he’d not been able to follow up on it once the debate with the butcher had started.

“Oh, meaning no disrespect, of course,” the innkeeper assured him hastily. By the intense young man’s accent he was clearly a foreigner himself, though it was hard to place him exactly. West of the Worldspines, certainly… “Being a port town, we get folks from all over, and we’re really quite cosmopolitan –”

“Yes, I’ve no doubt,” Korwin assured him, if a tad impatiently. “No offense was taken. But tell us more of these specific foreigners, the ones your tap-boy – Kemis, you said his name was? – took up with.”

“Oh, well,” the portly man sighed, setting his tray back down and frowning. “Not much to tell really. Several men, showed up maybe half a year past… not sure from where exactly, but they sound Aruhsali to my ear. They took lodgings up near the temple, and soon enough Kemis had taken off. I assume hired to do for them… but given his slovenly habits, I’ve no idea why. I’d’ve thought some local widow might’ve served better…”

“What business do these men follow, do you know?” Vulk asked, dishing himself a second bowl of the stew, which smelled like ambrosia and tasted of paradise.

“Well, not as such, your reverence… they’ve always kept very much to themselves; usually send the boy to do the shopping and such, come to think on it. But I believe they’re about some sort of scholarly work… what I’ve seen of any of them, they seem a bit bookish… I know at least one of them makes regular visits to the old book seller. I’ve little use for books and such things myself, of course, but to each his own, as I always say.”

The only thing he could add, before insisting he had to be about his work and bustling off, was that the foreigners lodged in a building north of the temple side yard. A location that kept coming up, Vulk thought – the missing alura, the killing of the silver-back bear nearby, the conversation between the surly hobo dwarf and the renegade tap-boy, and now these mysterious foreigners…

A suggestion was made that maybe they should lay a trap that night in the temple side yard – either Mariala all tarted up, or perhaps Vulk in drag, since he was prettier. The cantor pointed out there was no need for that, as both men and women worked the trade, and some of both had been taken… and besides, he wasn’t shaving his goatee! After a few more desultory sallies of wit the idea was tabled, at least until they’d had a chance to investigate the area… something they should probably do while the daylight lasted.

After polishing off the last of the amazing stew, the group had barely stepped into the street when the sound of distant shrieks and screams brought them instantly alert. The commotion seemed to be coming from the north, the direction of the Farmers Market. They set off at a run and soon encountered a score of panicked citizens fleeing south. The reason became obvious as they entered the plaza – an enormous black cat, sleek, beautiful and deadly looking, was padding silently through the stalls, ignoring the fleeing humans, mostly. Instead her brilliant green eyes were fixed on the little park – and the butcher’s milling pigs!

Erol was in the lead, and he rushed the panther with his net. He feinted left then, as the claws swiped out, released the net to the right, entangling the creature’s head and front claws in its mesh. As the big cat snarled and twisted about, trying to free herself, Mariala squeezed between Therok and Vulk to cast Fire Nerves on it. With a yowl the big cat collapsed to the pavement, writhing and mewling piteously for several seconds before slipping into merciful unconsciousness.

By the time Toran and Therok had the creature hog-tied and muzzled the City Guard arrived in the person of four sweaty, slightly worried looking men-at-arms. They seemed instantly relieved to find that someone had already dealt with the problem, but quickly reverted to worried when they were told to take the still very much alive beast up to the castle and find some secure place to keep it for the time being.

As three of the Guardsmen hefted the still groggy cat, Erol then began to track the panther back along its path, uphill to the north. Although he lost the certain trail around the still blood-stained cobbles where the silver-back had been killed, there was little doubt the big cat had come from, or at least through, the temple side yard. The bear, too, had been in the side yard as proven by the single footprint Toran discovered in a patch of thin grass and damp, clayey soil.

The group decided to split their efforts again. Toran, Vulk and Therok headed north, to the building where they hoped to find the mysterious foreigners lodging. It was, not incidentally, also the direction all these unusual animals seemed to be coming from. The rest of the party followed Korwin into the Temple of Tyvos, where he had already gone to pay his respects to his patron, the Immortal Lord of the Seas. Erol briefly checked out a glass shop on the east side of the yard, called the House of Pane, before joining the others in the temple.

As they approached it Toran could see that the two story stone and timber structure on the north side of the temple side yard was actually two buildings, sharing a common courtyard. A narrow passage between the buildings led, via an iron gate from the street, to the courtyard. The gate was hanging open as they approached, swinging slightly in the spring breeze off the bay. Toran pointed out the tufts of coarse brown bear fur caught on a rough patch of the iron bars to Vulk, and they proceeded cautiously into the narrow alley.

The door to the larger building, on their right, was also wide open, and Vulk called out a hail. There was no answer. Toran moved past him into the small courtyard, knocking on the two doors of the western building, then peering into windows when he got no response. All three residences seemed empty.

Therok bringing up the rear, the three men stepped cautiously through the open door of the eastern house and into a modest, if well-appointed, study/living room. It was a strange mixture of academic and slovenly, as if a brilliant but careless student lived there… or several scholars and a wastrel youth, perhaps?

There were books everywhere, on a range of subjects, from geography to Khundari history, metaphysics to navigation. Spread over a large desk were sheets of cheap paper covered in calculations of the most arcane sort. Scattered amongst and over almost everything were dirty clothes, plates of dried food, and at least two empty bottles of wine.

There was a small kitchen off the main room, and stairs up to the second floor, but between them stood a doorway into a storage area. It was this that immediately drew their attention, as a trap door could be seen within, open against the far wall. More arresting was the fact that the door to the room had been shattered into flinders. As if a great beast had forced its way through…

“Looking at these marks around the opening,” Toran said, crouching down to examine the trap door, “I’d say the bear actually came up these stone stairs from the cellar and then clawed its way out of the room. The panther came afterward, obviously…”

Vulk and Therok stared dubiously down into the darkness below and then at the dwarf. Toran shrugged. “It’s what the evidence suggests, odd as it seems.”

“It’s not that,” Vulk said with a short laugh. “I’ve no doubt you’re right. It’s just I’m not too sure about following this trail any further on our own. It’s one thing to split the party for a little light reconnaissance around town, but…”

“Oh, well, I suppose you’re right,” Toran sighed. “We should probably go fetch the others… although I’m sure we’d be fine, and I’m cursed curious about how these animals are getting here… it must be some sort of portal or gate, as you first suggested, Vulk, but…” With a shrug he his friend chivy him back out of the empty house and towards the temple.

When the others had entered the vast, shadowy silence of the temple they’d found Korwin at the main alter, making whatever silent communion with his patron Immortal as was his custom. Mariala, moved by the grandure of the place, and the beautiful patterns the westering sun sent through the stained glass, stepped into the niche set aside for her own Immortal patron, Shala, to offer up her own thoughts and devotion.

Devrik, after convincing Brann to sit outside the temple’s main doors and be a good boy, entered and found the somewhat larger alcove devoted to Cael and made his own obeisance. By the time Erol and Jeb had made their way into the sanctum the others were finishing their devotions and beginning to look around. They all found it odd that no one seemed to be attending to the temple… even with all the uncanny activity that seemed centered on it, surely its religious custodians wouldn’t;t abandon it…

Mariala was thinking about going upstairs, where no doubt the high cantor had his office and perhaps other functionaries might be found, when her attention was drawn by a sound coming from the stairway leading down into the crypts. Stepping to the head of the stairs she peered down into the dimness… torches must be lit in the crypts, because all was not pitch black. In fact she could see four small red lights…

Creeping up the stone stairs were the two largest rats she had ever seen — each one was almost as large as Brann, and their feral eyes gleamed red and malevolent in the dimness. It took a moment for her brain to process what it was seeing, and when it did, it froze up entirely – adrenaline flooded her body and every muscle locked up, while her mind simply went white as her life-long phobia seized her.

As the nearest dire rat leapt for her throat Mariala finally let out a piercing shriek of horror and her body unfroze just enough for her to throw up her arm in defense. The vicious rodent sank its teeth into the hardened kurbul of her vambrace, and its rear claws shredded her tunic but failed to find purchase against the acid-washed kurbul cuirass she wore beneath it.

She tried to fling the creature from her, but it clung, and its stench filled her nostrils as it clawed at her… it was simply too much for her over-loaded brain… she just shut down. As Mariala collapsed to the flagstones, however, the immense rodent lost its grip on her vambrace and rolled away. But it was back on its feet in an instant, preparing to leap again for her throat.

Erol, only a few feet behind Mariala when she screamed, lunged forward with his trident in hand as she collapsed. Standing over her prone form as the rat scrabbled for traction on the stone floor he skewered it, flinging its body away behind him and nearly hitting Jeb. While he didn’t share Mariala’s crippling fear of rodents, he had come to loath them during his time as an enslaved gladiator, and that hatred combined with his sudden fear for her well-being to drive his fury.

The second rat managed to evade his next thrust, but it failed to dodge Grover, who leapt from Erol’s shoulder onto the immense rodent, savaging it’s throat. The creature died, but not without exacting a price – in it’s death throes its rear claws raked the ferret’s side, drawing blood and causing him to limp back to Erol and curl up in his pack, licking his wounds.

Erol would’ve loved to take the time to tend to his friend’s wounds, but already another of the huge dire rats had appeared, and by the sound of it more were swarming up the stairs behind it. Korwin impaled that next beast on his Frost Blade, while Erol skewed the one behind, but more were coming…

Vulk, who had arrived via a side door with Toran and Therok just in time to see Mariala go down, rushed forward to lean over the carved wooden railing above the stairs. He aimed the Staff of Summer downward and the glowing, milky strands of the Weaver’s Web shot out, filling the stairwell with scores of binding ropes, ensnaring another five of the slavering creatures.

The rodents snapped and hissed, struggling to free themselves, but they had no leverage and the strands resisted their teeth. Vulk considered what to do next… they really needed to investigate the crypts he supposed, and they did make a nasty roadblock to that end…

“Say, Devrik,” the cantor called suddenly, tuning to his friend, who was just helping a pale, groggy Mariala back to her feet. “Think you could give us a little fire over here.”

Devrik, passing the still shaken Mariala off to Vulk for medical attention, stepped to the head of the stares and peered down at the writhing mass of trapped dire rats and grinned as he caught his friend’s meaning. The flickering flame in a nearby presence lamp was all the seed he needed for his pyrokinesis to feed off of, and a small sphere of fire appeared above his open palm. With a flick he sent it flying into the midst of the faintly glowing tangle of giant rats.

As they’d found in the hamlet of Hart’s Lodge, the strands burst into sudden flame, eventually burning away – but not before immolating all of the ensnared rodents. The stench of burning rat fur and flesh was unpleasant, but in a very short time Devrik was able to kick the smoking corpses off the stairs, clearing the path into the crypts. Any other dire rats that might have been lurking below seemed to have taken the warning and fled.

Mariala, however, having regained her composure and gotten a grip on her phobia, was reluctant to go down to the lower level until she was absolutely assured there was no more immediate evidence of even so much as a mouse visible. When she finally made her way down, with Erol and Jeb bringing up the rear, she saw that Devrik had missed one burned rat corpse. She viscously kicked the smoldering body off the steps, sending it flying into the dimness, before continuing down with some grim satisfaction.

The crypt of the Temple of Tyvos was one vast open cruciform space, upheld by a dozen pillars of stone carved in a stylized wave motif, and dimly lit by a half-dozen bronze braziers filled with slow-burning sea peat. Eleven elaborate stone sarcophagi were scattered about, and the walls were lined with scores of bronze plates marking burial niches.

At the north end was an area enclosed by three walls, tiled with beautiful mosaics, and housing a large stone statue on a marble plinth. According to the inscription carved on it, this was the final resting place of, and eternal memorial to, the great cleric who had founded the temple and oversaw its construction 140 years ago. It also appeared to have been used more recently as a lair for creature or creatures unknown – bones, both old and well-gnawed and quite fresh ones with bits of meat still on them, littered the floor.

Korwin, trying to determine where the bones had come from through the use of his psychometry talent, became quite convinced the older bones had belonged to a show girl named Lola who’d worked at a cabaret named… the Cobra? The Cobra’s Bandana?… anyway, the hottest spot north of Sydora… sometime around the turn of the last century…

The others exchanged meaningful glances (and the odd eye-roll) when he shared this intelligence, and went on about the business of searching the crypts for secret passages, mysterious glowing portals, or other such subtle clues.

It was a full turn of the glass before the Hand found the thing they were looking for – in the shadows of the northwest corner of the crypts, behind a particularly large and ornate sarcophagus, a section of the foundation had been cracked and partially collapsed. The breach looked new, no doubt a result of the recent earthquake, as Toran agreed (his eye-rolling was getting a workout today) when Erol suggested it. The resultant opening was just large enough for a grown man to squeeze through, after squeezing by the sarcophagus first.

“Well, the panther might have gotten through this,” Korwin said, eyeing the hole dubiously and rubbing his temples. The psychometry attempt had given him a headache. “But there’s no way a silver-back bear got through there. There must be another way to the surface…”

“Oh, there is,” Vulk and Toran said simultaneously. The Khundari gestured for the cantor to continue. “We didn’t get a chance to mention it, with all the excitement and Mariala fainting and all.” Mariala cast him dark look, but said nothing.

“We were coming to get you all,” Vulk went on, oblivious. “We found the house the foreigners were renting, we think… it was certainly where the bear and panther, at least, came from. Up from the cellar, actually. Maybe we should – Hey!”

That last was directed at Erol who, impatient with all the milling about jaw boning and anxious to see where the hole in the wall led, had squeezed past the sarcophagus and was just vanishing into the dark gap. With a shrug Toran followed, and one by one the others did as well, Vulk invoking Fortune’s Light on everyone.

The gap in the foundation opened into one of the main sewer lines of the town. The fading light of the setting sun cast the shadow of a street grating above them onto the surface of the murky waters of the drainage channel. The smell was not as bad as it might have been, the spring rains having kept things flowing relatively recently. The arched walls and ceiling of crumbling brick were damp and covered in patches of dark moss.

A raised walkway allowed the party to keep their feet dry and relatively clean as they followed Erol single-file while he tracked the spoor of some large rats. The party hadn’t gone far when they suddenly encountered a pack of living rats in the odoriferous flesh – not the terrifyingly large dire rats, true, but giant rats nonetheless, clearly close cousins of the one the ratter had shown them (and Cheron had dined on).

Their eyes gleaming a feral red in the dim light, the rats paused as they saw the group — and then began a mad, chittering rush forward. Erol managed to get off one arrow, skewering the lead rat, which slowed the others only momentarily. But that was all his companions needed.

Toran cast Stavin’s Arrow and killed two of the nearer rats with the translucent bolts of force. Mariala, again in iron control of her phobia, was nonetheless staying far enough back that her Fire Nerves only managed to fell three of the creatures – although she was gratified to see them collapse twitching into the filthy water, where they would no doubt drown.

Devrik finished off the pack with an Orb of Vorol hurled into their midst. Two of the rats closest to the fiery orb simply exploded in superheated balls of flaming body parts. The remaining giant rats either burned to death in a more conventional manner or died in the searing cloud of vaporized sewer water that engulfed them.

Unbeknownst to the Hand, a hunting pack of a dozen Taloxta, silently approaching from the darkness of a smaller nearby tunnel, had witnessed the demise of their rivals and, in a rare display of intelligence, decided that they weren’t really that hungry after all… so many tempting eyes notwithstanding. They slunk off into the dark, and so lived to torment other victims another day.

After a brief and fruitless foray to the north, whence came the giant rats, the group turned south again and soon came upon a short, narrow corridor that led to a half rotting wooden door, ajar. The small chamber beyond appeared once to have been home to a down-on-their-luck itinerant or two, although now nothing but two moldering beds and a half-rotted chest remained.

More interesting was the collapsed section of wall in the southwest corner of the room. This damage looked older than the damage to the temple’s foundation – at least a year, Toran estimated after crouching down to study the fall of stone and dirt. He also peered into the fairly large tunnel that sloped down into darkness… although it wasn’t quite dark, now was it?

While Toran studied the damaged wall and the tunnel beyond it, Erol, who had quickly decided that the room held nothing of interest, at least to him, had returned to the corridor and continued south. Most of the others, finding the room equally uninteresting, shrugged and followed him. Only Devrik and Korwin remained, the former to watch his Khundari friend’s back, the latter to make absolutely sure that old chest didn’t hold any secrets. Or valuables. Or valuable secrets…

When Toran finally turned back to his companions he was briefly surprised to see the others were gone… but in his excitement barely gave it a thought. “Devrik, come here, you have to see this!” he called, gesturing urgently at the tunnel. “There’s a pulsing light down here!” Warily, Devrik moved up beside his friend, discreetly checking to make sure he wasn’t somehow ensorcelled by this suspicious light. Korwin, finally giving up on his fruitless search of the rotting chest, joined them.

“Look, all this dirt has been well tamped down,” Toran pointed out. “A great many feet – booted feet – have trod this tunnel. And several animals, too, more recently… see, there’s the print of a big cat… and the tunnel is big enough for a bear, certainly. But look down the tunnel… see that pale white light that seems to flicker from around that first bend?”

Devrik glanced cautiously down the dark passage, and did indeed see a faint glow once his eyes adjusted. It didn’t seem particularly enchanting, so that was good. Korwin also saw the light, and was immediately on board with the ninja-dwarf’s suggestion that they investigate, scoffing at Devrik’s reluctance to split the party.

“Oh, the others will come back soon enough,” the water-mage urged. “It’s not like they’ll find another glowing mystery light, or anything else half so interesting, wherever they’ve gone. Once they get tired of roaming the sewers they’ll figure out where we’ve gone quick enough, and follow right on.”

Despite his misgivings, Toran’s intensity and Korwin’s enthusiasm combined with Devrik’s own strongly itching curiosity, and he gave in. Probably there was nothing too untoward down there any way, and they’d likely be back before the rest of the gang returned… what’s the worst that could happen?

♦ ♦ ♦ 

It was barely a score of meters down the southern branch of the sewer line that Erol, Mariala, Vulk and the minions did, in fact, come upon something rather more interesting than a mysteriously glowing light in a hole in the ground. A large section of the sewer wall had recently collapsed, and the gap thus created revealed a moderately large chamber beyond – a chamber that appeared to be a very old Khundari burial chamber.

Clambering up the large pile of fresh rubble that half choked the sewer, then down into the chamber, they found that they hardly needed the goddess-given sight of Vulk’s ritual – the room appeared to be suffused with a faint greenish glow, seeming to come from everywhere and nowhere. Four distinctive Khundari sarcophagi were set in small niches around the room, and four carved pillars upheld a central dome. But it was a larger sarcophagus in an alcove in the north wall – almost a small room of its own, really – that drew their attention. The stone coffin was made of matte black basalt and was covered in arcane symbols and runic text.

“This is an ancient version of the runic alphabet,” Mariala said, peering at the large words spelled out on the side, but not moving from the center of the main chamber. “But if I’m reading this right… let’s see… yes, this is the tomb of someone named Kordäth… the… Bleakheart? It also seems to be a warning… and those symbols are defiantly wards of some–”

Before she could finish her sentence the sound of grinding stone-on-stone filled the fetid air as the lid of the sarcophagus slowly slid aside. Jeb and Therok both stepped back, subtly shifting to place themselves behind their principals, as a ghoulish figure sat up and began to pull itself out of the sarcophagus. It appeared to be a gaunt, white bearded Kundari, dressed in ragged, once-rich robes, beneath which pitted and corroded armor could be seen. It glowed with a sickly green aura, and the stink of the grave was on it.

There was nothing spectral or translucent about the figure, however, and as soon as its feet were planted on the stone flags of the floor it drew a wicked looking black dagger from its belt. It began to stalk slowly toward the party, it’s glowing green eyes mesmerizing, a greedy gleam flickering in the depths…

Mariala felt a sudden lashing of malevolent force against her mental shields, and she recoiled in distaste. In the brief instant of contact, before she repelled the creature’s attempt at domination, she experienced something of its mind – thoughts of rage and betrayal… buried alive, but sustained by an indomitable will and… a connection to… some great force… long centuries of imprisonment… rage banked to embers, but never wholly dying… sudden freedom, at last! And a terrible thirst… a thirst for the life of others…

“I don’t know what this thing is,” she warned the others. “I don’t sense the Shadow within it, thank Shala… but nevertheless, I think it would be an extraordinarily bad idea to let it touch you!”

Vulk, even more familiar with the cold nothingness of the Shadow, was greatly relieved himself to get no sense of it radiating from the creature —but he was taking no chances. Once again he summoned up the Weaver’s Web, filling the mouth of the alcove with glowing strands from side-to-side and floor-to-ceiling, imprisoning the horrifying undead dwarf.

His feeling of satisfaction was fleeting as a shriek from Jeb, followed by a slightly more manly bellow of fear from Therok, caused him to whirl around. Two skeletal knights, chests and skulls glowing with a brilliant green light from within, lumbering toward the group from behind.

As Jeb fumbled to nock an arrow and Therok grabbed for his sword, Erol leaped past Vulk to thrust his trident at the nearest skeleton. It’s pitted sword knocked the shaft down enough to avoid a blow to the spine, but its legs became entangled in the weapon’s tines and it stumbled to the ground with a clatter of rusted armor.

Marila, meanwhile, had whipped up her cross-bow, kept (like her nerves) on a hair trigger since they’d entered the temple crypt, and fired off a bolt at the second skeleton that was reaching for a shaking, wide-eyed Jeb. The iron shaft pierced the base of the spine, shattering it to dust. This seemed to break whatever unholy magic was animating the thing, and the undead horror collapsed with a clatter into a pile of bones and corroded armor. The sickly green light at its core quickly faded into nothingness.

Vulk aimed his staff at the first skeleton as it staggered back to its feet and let loose a flight of Stavin’s Arrows. The translucent force bolts seemed to have little effect, however, and the creature swung a surprisingly swift blow at Erol, who countered with his trident. This time he plunged the weapon into the verdigris light of the undead thing’s chest. Ribs shattered and the spine snapped, and it joined its companion as just another pile of decaying bones and rusted armor, its own green glow fading away.

The heroes were allowed no breathing room, however, as they turned once more to find Therok engaged with the revenant Kordäth, who had made short work of Vulk’s webs, slashing through them with his black dagger as if they were spider webs in truth. The barbarian retainer had been the first to notice, and had dashed forward to place himself between the creature and Mariala’s back.

His sword parried the blow aimed at his heart, but as the slashing blade slid aside Kordäth twisted it, managing to drive it into B-Fiddy-five’s calf. The barbarian staggered back with a yell, his leg giving out and dropping him to the floor. The undead Khundari reached one leathery, desiccated hand out toward him…

Mariala’s Fire Nerves struck the undead warrior full in the head… to no effect, beyond drawing its malevolent gaze toward her. She felt the draining cold of its mental assault on her shields again, but had no trouble deflecting it once again.

The delay had been enough to give Jeb time to loose the arrow he’d finally nocked and drawn. It flew true, straight for the ghoul’s head – only to be snatched from the air by the creature’s leathery hand, just centimeters from its left eye. With a malevolent grin the thing snapped the shaft in two and turned its cold gaze toward the young archer.

Before it could launch a psychic attack on the boy, however, Erol was on it with his trident, slashing and jabbing, forcing the revenant to dodge and twist, with surprising agility, and parry with its glittering black dagger.

At that point the undead thing that had once been Kordäth made a tactical error. It turned its back on Mariala to focus on the tall Telnori warrior, representative of an ancient enemy which its black soul remembered well. It dodged another feint, and then went in for a counterstrike, the wicked sharp edge of the obsidian dagger, glinting in the unnatural light of the crypt, barely missing Erol’s face.

The crossbow bolt took the undead warrior in the back of the head, piercing the skull with a sound like a mirror cracking, the iron shaft exiting though Kordäth’s open mouth. With a psychic wail that only Mariala heard the green light faded from its eyes even as Erol watched, the nimbus surrounding the body and filling the room dimming to nothing. As quickly as that, the revenant spirit was gone.

“Where the Void are the others?” Vulk asked as he invoked the Besssing of Kasira over the remains of all three of the former undead, now hopefully really and truly dead. He really hated the undead, and generally preferred a lot more backup than this when facing them…

“Hmmm, I guess it’s not such a good idea to split the party,” Erol said diffidently, wiping the gristly gore from his trident and checking on Grover, who was doing well, nibbling on his Baylorium®-infused Ferret Treat™ in his nest in his master’s pack. “Although I think we did rather well on our own… mostly.”

Therok, who was being helped back to his feet by Mariala, gave the former gladiator a narrow-eyed look, but said nothing. Vulk bent to tend to his gashed calf while Mariala turned to look out the collapsed wall into the sewer. Still currently-rat-free she noted, and sighed.

“I suppose we should head back and find the others…”

♦ ♦ ♦ 

Toran, Devrik and Korwin made their way down the mysterious tunnel to find themselves in what looked like an even more mysterious ancient Khundari chamber (easily 2,000 years old, by Toran’s estimate). Most of the walls had collapsed long ago (only the rubble-strewn tunnel they’d entered through looked fresh), leaving only a three cubic meter open space. In that space a column of shifting white light rose from floor to ceiling.

They all assumed it was a portal, of course, and this was confirmed almost at once. Appearing as if through a glowing fog, another panther, this one male, had materialized from the column. It stalked out of the shimmering light, giving them no more than a wary glance, and quickly disappeared up the tunnel.

Once again, at Toran’s excited insistence and Korwin’s relentless badgering, Devrik let his common sense be overruled. But not so far as to fail all basic precautions – before they plunged into the mysterious portal he wrote a note for the others on one of Mariala’s entangled papers. For good measure he left the original near the mouth of the tunnel, using a bit of rubble for a paper weight.

Then they’d stepped through…

… and out of a hazy white light to find themselves on a circular stone platform about 10 meters across. At the center of the platform, now behind them, rose the column of milky white light from which they’d just stepped. It was centered in a circle of what looked like melted, twisted and fused metal, three meters in diameter. Within the column’s light faint whorls of shifting, pale colors could be seen slowly writhing and curling in on themselves, like smoke from a pipe.

But what grabbed the attention almost instantly, was the fact that the platform was floating in the air very far above the ground… and the ground was the bottom of an immense spherical cavern perhaps 200 meters in diameter. A diffuse gray light filled the immense space, revealing three other identical platforms floating in the air nearby, each one, like their own, connected to a much larger circular platform between and below them by short flights of stairs. The large central platform was more than 30 meters across, the stairs that connected it to its satellite platforms spaced even around its rim, and the whole assembly floating uncannily at the center of the immense space.

The stonework of all five platforms looked old and worn, Toran noted, with a hint of scorch marks over large patches of the surfaces. The edges of the platforms were jagged and crumbling, and the stairs were in particularly bad shape. The shattered remnants of what may have been a circular walkway that once connected the outer platforms floated in a slowly orbiting ring around the  large platform.  The whole construction had an air of very great age… and an indefinable aura of long abandonment.

Each of the satellite platforms had its own central column of shimmering light, while the larger platform did not. At its center was a slowly rotating disk of matte black stone (basalt, Toran absently noted to his friends) into which sigils of glowing white light were etched. Around the perimiter of this disk was a band of shiny non-rotating black stone (obsidian, Toran observed in passing) that was etched with silver-inlaid runes. Runes of the very most ancient Khundari form.

“I think I might know where we are,” the Shadow Warrior said, almost too low to hear. A thrill of excitement and awe ran up his spine, and he shivered. “I think this is… the Fane of Gheas!”

“The what of who, now?” Korwin asked after a moment of blank silence. Devrik winced and swatted him upside the head, giving Toran an apologetic eye roll.

“The Fane of Gheas,” Toran repeated in annoyance, as the wonder of the moment slipped away. “It is a legend of my people, almost a myth I would’ve said. But this is so much as it’s described in the tales of the ancient world, tales I learned as a child…

“Tells us about it,” Devrik encouraged, as Korwin rubbed his head.

“During the time of the Codominion, when Khundari, Umantari, Telnori and the Immortals all lived together in harmony and peace, before the coming of the Demon Plague and the tragedy of the Demon’s Fist, during the time of the building of the Eight Cities of the Dwarves –”

“Yes, yes, it was a long time ago,” Korwin interrupted nervously. He really didn’t like heights, and even thought they weren’t that close to the edge… “Can we move it along?”

Toran stared at his companion for a moment, resisting the urge to put a throwing star into his shoulder. But he sensed the other man’s discomfort with their position and his jangled nerves, and with a sigh he let it go.

“So, the Fane of Gheas was said to have been built in that age, a master work of the Khundari priests of our Great God Gheas, made with His blessing and guidance. It was said to be a spatial nexus connecting many different places on, above, and beneath the world, by a method unrelated to the naturally occurring Nitaran Gates. Some say it could even connect to other worlds and dimensions, but that always seemed to me to be too fantastical…”

“Well, this seems pretty fantastical already,” Devrik growled, a little awed himself by the immense structure… and its unnerving defiance of gravity. “So I’m not discounting anything. But where in the world was – is – this Fane of yours? Where are we?”

“No idea… and no one knows,” Toran said with a shrug. “Only the most outrageous of the tales ever claimed to know where the Fane was located, some even claiming it wasn’t in our world at all. But whatever the truth, the secret of its physical location was known only to the founding priests of the Dha’ghean Khor sect. Through the centuries that and their successor brothers acted as “ferrymen,” of sorts, for travelers they deemed worthy to use the Paths of Gheas, whether individuals or small armies. It was also known as the Eye of the World–”

“What the Void is that?” Korwin interrupted again, grasping Toran’s shoulder and pointing to the platform directly opposite theirs. In the pillar of light at the center of that platform a figure had begun flickering in and out of sight – it appeared to be a Khundari, his face twisted in a rictus of fear or pain. Even as they focused on him, however, he faded away altogether…

“Huh!” Toran said with a surprised grunt, and immediately headed for the shattered steps down to the central platform, pausing only to pull a stick of charcoal from his scrip and mark “their” platform. Leaping down the steps he barely seemed to notice the crumbling stone, the gaps, or the 100 meter drop they revealed, moving as nimbly over them as if on a grand staircase in a ballroom… the benefits of a ninja education.

Korwin, on the other hand, very much noticed the gaps and the extremely dubious condition of the stairs. Moving to follow the dwarf, he paused with a jerk at the first step. But under Devrik’s sardonic smirk, he flushed, gathered his resolve, and… staggered was really the only word for it, the fire-mage decided… down the stairs.

While Devrik held his position on the high ground, Toran went right around the central basalt disk on the main platform, while Korwin went left – neither was prepared to risk those arcane glyphs without knowing more. Just as they came abreast of the stairs to the two intermediary satellite platforms the pillars of light on those two, as well as on the one ahead, shifted from white to a pulsing pastel, each one a different color. Devrik glanced behind himself, but the pillar they’d enter via remained a soft white, with only swirling hints of pastel colors in its depth.

Toran, glancing up to his right, was arrested by the sight of something emerging from the violet glow of the pillar there. As it stepped into focus, he found his battle-axe in his hands reflexively. The thing was perhaps the most hideous abomination of life he’d ever witnessed – a mass of writhing tentacles and scores of eyes of varying sizes and colors forming its central mass, which was upheld by two tree trunk-like legs, themselves made up of entwined tentacles. The body, if it could be said to have one, was an electric blue, fading to a translucent, pustulant green at the tips of the upper tentacles; the legs were a dark brown.  

The creature immediately spied Toran, and with a weird, wet ululation began to lumber, with surprising speed and grace, down the crumbling stairs towards him. Holding his battle-axe in one hand the Shadow Warrior gestured with the other and sent an almost-invisible flight of Stavin’s Arrows into the writhing abomination. The magical bolts struck its center of mass, the thing shrieking and falling apart as if each tentacle was a separate entity.

The pieces struck directly by the attack withered and died quickly, but the rest began to writhe about blindly for a moment. But within seconds they began to wriggle and squirm their way towards one another; in another few seconds they began to reform, twisting together once more to form a hideous whole.

Just as the transformation was nearing completion, however, Devrik’s Orb of Vorol, hurled from his own platform, struck the writhing abomination dead center. The reassembling pieces instantly flew apart again, this time with much greater force and in flames. The burning pieces of twisted flesh mostly plunged over either side of the stairs, raining down on the cavern floor far below like some hideous meteor shower.

With an acknowledging wave to Devrik, Toran re-stowed his weapon and resumed his jog over to the far platform, mounting its shattered steps as easily as he’d come down the first set. He had only to wait a moment before the colors of the three columns, including the one he now stood by, shifted back to white. Seconds after they did the shadowy form of the Khundari appeared again… it grew as if rushing towards him from a great distance, then flickered in and out of sight, never quite gone but never quite there…

Just as Korwin made his queasy way up to join Toran, the trapped Dwarf seemed to notice them. His expression changed from fear and pain to one of desperate hope. His mouth moved, but at first they could hear nothing, and the hand he reached out, although appearing solid, moved through Toran’s grasp as if made of smoke.

A few words became audible, but as if from a great distance. “…blood of a… Kundari… must take the…” There were gaps, though, where they saw the lips move but heard no sound, and the figure seemed to pulse in and out of phase with reality. Then, as quickly as he had appeared, the mysterious figure was gone, receding away again… but not completely, Toran realized. He could still see the faintest, ghostly hint of the man. A moment later, another cycle of colors began pulsing through the three active columns, eventually settling into three new shades. Through it all he could just make out the trapped figure, so translucent as to be almost invisible, and seeming both very distant and immediately present.

“I think I know what we need to do,” Korwin cupped his hands to his mouth and shouted across to Devrik. Fortunately sound seemed to carry well in the strange, dead air of the immense cavern, and the fire-mage had no trouble understanding him. “We need Toran to cut himself – a good cut right across his palm is probably best – and drip his Khundari blood into that central sigil, in the middle there. I think…”

Toran paid no particular attention to his friend, focused as he was on watching the pillar of light, waiting for the cycle to begin again. While the Imperial went on about his theory of Dwarven blood being needed to operate the Fane of Gheas Toran readied himself…

When the imprisoned Khundari, who he was fairly certain was the probably clan-less derelict Bektam, made his next phase back towards reality, he was ready. When the man seemed as solid as himself, when his words were audible, if distant, he shot a hand out to grasp the other’s arm. For an instant he felt an almost solid touch… but even as the sensation registered it was gone and he held nothing but misty light.

He’d tried to read Bektam’s lips, but the phasing flicker seemed to blur him around the edges and he could make out nothing. A few different words came through, but were little more help… “pure blood… sigil of… four-fold path…” It was so frustratingly close to being clear, he felt the answer was hanging just out of his grasp, like the delicious peacock tail fungi of old Farmer Mhyklop, growing from the ceilings of the cultivation caves.

He was torn from his thoughts by a warning from Devrik – something was coming through the portal from Gevdan Town

♦ ♦ ♦ 

Erol, Marila, Vulk and the rest returned to the sad little bedroom off the main sewer line to find it empty, their friends nowhere to be found. Erol, checking for tracks, seemed certain that a large cat, at least as large as the panther they’d encountered early, had come through the room. But as there was no blood, and it was unlikely that such an animal could have bested all three of the men in any case, it was dismissed as irrelevant.

“But the tracks come from this tunnel,” he concluded. “And it looks like our friends went down the tunnel… before the cat came up, in fact. I just can’t believe they’d go down there without us.”

“Perhaps they had a good reason,” Mariala said, frowning. “Still, I’d expect Devrik, at least to – oh!” A sudden inspiration struck, and she reached into her scrip for her entangled parchment. Sure enough, there was one of Devrik’s with his surprisingly beautiful handwriting visible. It explained what they’d found and what they were doing.

“No, no good reason at all,” she sighed, handing the note to Erol to read. He snorted and handed it to Vulk, but the cantor waved it away with a distracted motion.

“Wait, I’m getting something… Cherdon is trying to… oh! I see what he’s trying to tell me… ” he smiled as he came out of his semi-trance. “I think we need to wait a few minutes before we follow the others. Jeb, Therok, I think you should head back to the surface…”

♦ ♦ ♦

Haplo made his way down from Kar Gevdan at a brisk pace. His mission to the High Town and the Eastport docks had proved both long and fruitless. The shippers had turned out to be no more dishonest than any successful merchant, and after extensive questioning and a very thorough searching of their various holdings, almost certainly not in league with Darikazi slavers. Or spies.

The one irregularity he’d stumbled across, the smuggling of a certain illicit substance from Pangonia, was so minor, in his eyes, that it seemed unfair to call them on it under the circumstances. The rather uptight Guard captain might have felt differently, but he’s missed the clue and Haplo saw no need to direct his attention toward it.

The younger of the Sheltam sons had been present and had blanched when he’d realized what Haplo had found. And had then shot the young mage a deeply grateful look when he’d realized he was going to let it pass – a byplay that, once again, the captain failed to note. Nor did he see the small pouch that was slipped to his companion as they were leaving the shipper’s offices to return to the castle.

Having made their negative report to the lord Baron, the captain had returned to his wife and home for supper, while Haplo had declined Lord Tynal’s invitation to dine. He was hungry, certainly, but decided to try and find the others. Perhaps they’d discovered a decent inn during their afternoon’s investigation, and he could hear all about their findings over a meal and tankard or two. And now he had something to share for afters, as it turned out.

The sun was already near the horizon when he reached the Low Town, and he was grateful for the torch the Baron’s seneschal had insisted he take. He lit it now with his flint and steel, and set out to find his friends. A few questions of the locals, and some garbled tales of giant black cats and magical nets, led his to the side yard of the local temple devoted to the Sea God Tyvos.

He was just casting about, trying to decide where to check next, when Vulk’s familiar, the sleek and beautiful peregrine falcon Cherdon, had dropped down onto his shoulder. Momentarily startled, he’d relaxed once he’d recognized the bird – and then had the sudden realization that Vulk might be looking at him through those too-intelligent black eyes. When it motioned with its head toward the temple, he took the hint.

At the temple doors he found Brann, Devrik’s good natured hound, dozing with his head resting forlornly on his paws. The beast leaped up when he smelled Haplo, and seemed pleased at a familiar scent, if not that of one of his own people. Man and dog followed the raptor into the temple, where they ran into Jeb and Therok coming up the wide stone steps from the crypt…

♦ ♦ ♦

As Vulk, Mariala, Haplo, and Erol stepped through the light and out onto the floating platform, they suffered the same sense of awe and vertigo that their friends had experienced earlier. They explained that they had left Jeb and Therok behind, with orders to report all they’d done and learned to the Baron if none of them had returned by the end of the Cat watch. But Cherdon and Brann were with them, and Grover was still comfortably ensconced in Erol’s pack.

The raptor took immediately to the air, and seemed to enjoy the strange open-and-yet-enclosed space. Brann seemed uneasy and stayed close to Devrik, who thumped his side reassuringly. Grover peered over the mouth of his pack, glanced around, and went back to sleep.

Once the people had acclimated themselves to the wonder of the Fane, and been told of the dangers (they all peered over the edge to look at the small, smoking dots that were the remains of the writhing abomination), they began to brainstorm the puzzle of freeing the trapped Khundari. They all agreed he was probably the mystery-Dwarf Bektam, and they had a great many questions for him.

Korwin, who preferred not to traverse the fractured stairs any more than necessary, stayed on the far platform, ostensibly to watch for the returning phase-shifting Dwarf, and called out his continued insistence that they needed to bleed Toran to make everything work… to no avail.

After examining the slowly revolving central disk Toran eventually pronounced that the thing to try was a drop of his own blood in the central, and probably controlling, sigil of the interlocking wards.

Korwin threw up his hands and shook his head in disgust…

But as Toran was moving towards the central disk, and Devrik moved down from the other side to occupy one of the outer sigils, the portals shifted colors once again. And this time, out of the column of light opposite the one from which the writhing abomination had come, an immense shape appeared.

It was at least 8 meters long, resembling nothing so much as a bizarre eel, with a long tubular body that ended in a wide tail and two fins just in back of the head. It’s underbelly was pale violet, while its topside was a deep, mottled purplish color, fading to teal at the tips of the extremities. A little bit back from the head were four long, clawed tentacles, two sprouting from across each other on the top, and two more of the same on the underbelly. The head was roughly triangular-shaped, with a spherical, somewhat beak-like nose and a round mouth like a lampreys, lined with razor teeth. Above the nose were their three glowing blue eyes, each one set atop the other. Tendrils and a few shorter tentacles dangled from the bottom of the head.

As the Hand watched in horror the thing drifted out, undulating through the air as if it were in water, a wave of psychic malevolence and self-satisfaction rolling off of it, to those sensitive to it. And with that psychic emanation seemed to come a name… Lagor’enth. But whether a proper name or species name was unclear, even to Mariala.

It seemed to focus its immediate attention on Toran, who had the misfortune to be in its direct line of sight as it cleared the smaller platform. The Khundari loosened his battle-axe and dropped into a fighting crouch…

The Lagor’enth suddenly stooped and whipped out two clawed tentacles. Toran rolled under the first to drive his axe along the creature’s pale underbelly, but to no effect — its skin seemed as hard as stone. The second tentacle he dodged with a brilliant leap and roll, coming to one knee as he loosed a barrage of Stavin’s Arrows. These struck the creature full on but seemed to do no more damage than his axe.

Erol, having taken Devrik’s place on the original platform, drew a shaft to his longbow and let fly, hitting the flying behemoth at the base of one of its main tentacle-fins. It snapped around as if bitten by some annoying tick, briefly thrashing its long tail.

Mariala stood at the base of the stairs below Erol, and as his arrow struck she released a blasts of Fire Nerves. This, too, seemed merely to discomfit the beast but not really damage it… although… was it moving a little slower now, and maybe a bit less smoothly?

Toran aimed his second casting of Stavin’s Arrows at what looked like a softer, less well-armored patch of the creature’s thorax, just below the mouth. This time the near-invisible bolts got a reaction – it reared back and thrashed the air, sending out psychic waves of disbelief, anger, and pain. Enough pain, apparently, that it turned from this small tormentor to go for seemingly easier prey – Devrik.

The Lagor’enth’s tentacle-claws whipped out viciously, but Devrik was ready, having keenly watched the others’ attacks and the beast’s responses. He nimbly dodged the two-pronged attack, leaping to use one tentacle to push off and into his counterattack. He struck at the same soft spot Toran had found, and from which blue-black ichor was already flowing. He drove his battlesword deep into the beast’s thorax, then ripped it down as he dropped to the stone floor, rolling away as the dark ichor gushed forth in a flood.

The creature reared up, emitting an almost ultrasonic squeal and another psychic blast of shock, fear and pain. Even those with limited psionic talent felt that one, and no one escaped the headache that followed. The body crashed to the main platform at its very edge, spasmed once, and then slowly slid off. The sound when it hit the cavern floor, joining the still smoldering bits of the writhing abomination, was like the world’s largest pumpkin dropped from a tall tower.

Once everyone was recovered, they decided they’d best move fast if they had any hope of gaining control of this immense artifact before something even worse emerged from one of the shifting portals. Toran, after a fruitless attempt to stop or slow the central disk’s rotation by hand, took his place in the center circle, while Devrik, Mariala, Haplo and Vulk took up positions in each of the satellite circles. Korwin stood ready to pull Bektam from his prison, while Erol guarded the portal home, arrow nocked to bow in case anything else came through another gate.

Toran pricked his thumb with his dagger and let several drops of blood fall to the basalt upon which he stood, then began to recite the words inscribed on the encircling stone band… the pace of the disk’s rotation was perfect for the task. The others focused their thoughts on Gevdan and home. A thrum of power began to build, and as it reached a crescendo the disk slowed and then locked into place with its four outer circles aligned with the four outer platforms. The pillars of light all flared once, then settled into four new shades of pastel colors. The sound died away.

A cry from Korwin drew everyones attention to the platform where he stood, now attempting to hold up the half-collapsed figure of a dazed and gasping Khundari. Everyone looked to Toran before stepping off their circles, and after a moment’s consideration, he nodded, freeing them. They all rushed to join Korwin and the now freed Dwarf. The central disk remained motionless.

Bektam of Gevdan, I presume,” Toran said, taking the weight from Korwin and letting the weakened man sink to his knees.

“Yes, cousin, I am,” the Dwarf replied in Khundari accented with the sounds of the western Greatsone Mountains. “My eternal gratitude for freeing me from that horrible, horrible trap, may your sons carry your memory forward ten thousand years!”

“You’re welcome,” Toran replied drily. “But we’ll circle back to that gratitude after you’ve answered some questions we have. And not all my friends speak our tongue, so stick to the Common… I know you speak Esparic perfectly well.”

Bektam was reluctant to answer the Hand’s questions at first, his gratitude not withstanding, trying for vague generalities and noncommittal answers. But they quickly impressed upon him the fact that he wasn’t leaving this place until he’d provided the answers they sought. With a surly sigh, he grudgingly told his story.

“I’ve been a, a wander for twenty years now,” he began. “A free spirt of the open road.” (A renegade or outcast, Toran thought grimly, but let the deception, maybe even self-deception, pass).

“I came to Gevdan Town about seven years ago, and I’ve made my living as a handyman, of sorts, providing the Umantari with the benefit of Khundari metal-smithing skills and stone working…

“But I’ve never liked sleeping aboveground, and for several years past I’ve made my home in a snug little room in the Underneath, near the temple of Tyvos. This was going on just fine, I guess you’d say, until about a year ago. An earthquake shook the city… from that eruption of Mt. Katai, way off west, they said afterward.”

His audience studiously avoided looking at Devrik, whose infant son had been more-or-less responsible for that eruption. Devrik merely tightened his jaw and glowered at no one in particular. Bektam missed the byplay entirely and went on with his tale.

“It didn’t do much damage, though I was busy for a tenday, checking people’s chimneys and foundations. But ’twas my own digs that took the real damage. One corner of my room collapsed, opening the way to… well, if you’re here, you know to what. Took me awhile to widen and shore up the tunnel, but eventually I found the glowing portal to… here.

” I knew at once what this place must be… I remembered it from the tales my grand da told me before I– back when I was a young ‘un. It took me a bit to… well, I had all that work, you see, after the quake… anyway, eventually I tried one of the other portals. It took me to a frozen mountain top, with air so cold and thin I could hardly breathe! I didn’t stay long, ha!

“The next portal took me to an island in an endless sea… hot and humid, and all that horrible water as far as the eye could see. I went inland, hoping for better, but it was a small island.. and the dark-skinned Umantari were none too friendly. Besides, who could understand that jibber-jabber?

“But third time’s the charm as they say, and by Gheas I thought my luck really had changed with the last portal. I found myself in a cave in the foothills of the mountains, near a forest meadow, spring flowers abloom. I even thought the mountains looked familiar, like those of home. As it turned out, they were a part of the range north of my old home. A few hundred kilometers and I could have –

“Well, but these mountains were in Darikaz, that pit of vipers. A dark land, for all its beauty, the very worst of the cursed humans blighting–” He seemed to remember his audience, and grew silent. Although certainly Vulk looked to be in perfect agreement with his assessment.

“To cut the tale short, I wasn’t there two days before I fell into the hands of fiends in the guise of men – a Korönian clerical sect I came to learn, the Order of the Burning Tower. Over time I learned more — that they were in decline, having ended up on the wrong side of some religious dispute (or more likely a power grab) within their cult some years past. These, the last score of surviving brothers, now moved from place to place, plotting their revenge on all who had betrayed them… but most of all on the primate of their own religion. 

“By sheer bad luck (really the only kind I know) I arrived and had been enslaved just as the chaos caused by the assassination of the Darikazi king reached the hinterland. Their country had collapsed into civil war, but as things fell apart this Order saw only opportunity, a chance to regain their lost power. And maybe more… for I had told them how I had come to their land… and the legends of the Fane.

“One of their number, a leader amongst them, was a powerful mage and telekinetic named Sevrok Baltan, and he had actually heard tales of the Path of Gheas. He compelled me to take him through the portal in the hidden cave, to the Fane itself. He was… besotted by the possibilities.

“It took him five months of intense study and constant experimentation, but he slowly learned, and eventually was able to make the Fane function, at least in a semi-random fashion. My own status rose during this time, for he realized early on that he needed one of pure Khundari blood to make it function at all. I was still a prisoner and slave, but now at least a well cared for one.” He frowned bitterly at some memory, but didn’t elaborate.

“He learned to keep the connections between the Fane and Darikaz and Tharkia active, while allowing the other two portals to be shifted. But his control of those other portals was erratic… really little better than sheer chance, as far as I could tell. But slowly Sevrok did seem to be making progress…

“About six months ago, as their hoarded coin began to run low, they hit upon a plan to make the Paths begin to pay them for all their work. They began by setting up a network of spies in Tharkia and took to stealing slaves to fill their coffers back home, while Sevrok worked to discover how to open the Path to exactly where they wanted to go – the Korönian primate’s palace!

“Everything seemed to be going Sevrok’s way… until the 11th of this month. Gheas, please tell me it’s still Sarnia! I can’t have been trapped more than a tenday, could I?” He looked briefly panicked, until reassured it was only the 22nd of the month. He let out a deep breath and continued.

“Most of the brothers in Tharkia were in Zurhan that day to gather the latest harvest of slaves (they’d begun taking special orders from “clients”) and collect the reports of their spies. How they slipped up, I don’t know, but the King’s men apparently laid an ambush for them in the tavern they used for these meetings, and the ring was exposed and broken up.

“The only reason I know this was that a single member of the Order in Tharkia not taken or killed was an idiotic young acolyte, named Kemis. They’d recruited him as a local face for their mundane business, and had eventually come to use him as a native decoy to lure victims into slavery in the capital. The boy fled back to Gevdan after the debacle at the Mermaid’s Song Inn, and found me.

“And once he’d told his breathless tale, I saw my chance. Oh don’t look at me like that, cousin. Yes, they’d left me free in Gevdan, had done so for months. But there are other restraints besides the physical, and Sevrok’s hooks were deep. There was no escaping from them, except through death. My own, I’d always thought, but now I realized their deaths would serve me just as well. As long as I could stay out of the hands of the few remaining brothers in Darikaz!

“I knew the boy, Kemis, would never betray the Order – he’d drunk the wine too deeply – but I knew I needed two, at least, to operate the Fane. That bastard Sevrok had made sure to keep me far from his work, and as ignorant as possible of how he was achieving even his limited control of the paths. But he still needed me to actually do it, and I learned more than he realized. I was sure I could operate the Fane, and I had no care where the portals took me, as long as it was far from Darikaz or Tharkia!

“But I was not as clever as I thought I was… or else the Korönian scum had been better at keeping vital parts of the procedure secret. I put Kemis in the Gevdan circle, since he knew enough to know we needed to anchor that point. And I did succeed in shifting the pattern! The boy might have begun to suspect then, but he was never the sharpest blade in the rack.

“But I’d missed something. I made my dash for a portal but as I stepped off the central disk an intense pulse of energy burst out from the central platform. It shook the entire cavern, as if a giant had kicked it. I felt myself thrown forward, and for a moment I lay half stunned.

” When I staggered up I could see that the boy had been hurled from the center disk as well, and was laying unconscious on the far side. But I had no thought for him, I just wanted out. I stepped into the former “Darikaz” portal, knowing it had shifted destinations – only to be gripped as if by ten thousand tiny hands, all trying to tear me apart. I turned, trying to retreat, but I was trapped.

“My body began shifting in and out of phase – one second I was in the Cavern, the next in an open field, then back to the Cavern, and then a mountain top. Or rather, I was almost in those locations. It was an agonizing sensation, and I could never pull myself free. The three portals began randomly shifting, and every time they did I was torn between here and some new, random place. 

“It was the boy’s presence on the “Gevdan” circle that kept it locked to that location, and when he finally came around he took one look me, silently screaming, begging for his help… and he fled. Into the wrong portal.

“As I said, he wasn’t very bright. I have no idea where he ended up, he never came back. Never had a chance to, really, given when in the cycle he went through – they changed again within seconds of his passage.

“For… I don’t know how long… I was trapped in my painful limbo, only occasionally phasing into reality enough to communicate, but never for more than a few seconds, as you saw. Nothing came through my portal, I think because I was blocking it… but the other two saw a strange stream of traffic… wild beasts, monsters, and some things I can’t even describe passed through the open portals. 

“The creatures tended to wander the platform, then leave again… sometimes through the same portal (although it would almost always have reset to some other location by then), more often through one of the other functioning portals. Including the one to Gevdan.”

With Bektam’s technical description of what he understood of the function of the Fane, the Hand suddenly realized that all four portals had almost certainly been reset when they’d freed him. Erol volunteered to go through what had been the portal to Gevdan.

He was only gone a minute before returning to confirm that yes, the other side of the gate was no longer under the town of Gevdan. It was instead in the middle of a steaming tropical rain forest, and daytime, rather than just after sunset, as it should be. No one looked happy.

Korwin tried another portal, finding a white-capped gray sea below high white cliffs and a scudding wrack of clouds. It was either early morning or late afternoon, but he had no reference to be sure of which. Devrik stepped through a third portal into a burning dessert of red sand, dunes stretching as far as he could see, a deep blue bowl of sky above and the sun almost directly overhead.

Mariala was about to step through the last portal when Bektram suddenly leapt to his feet and, with surprising speed given his debilitated condition, dashed past her into the column of light. While Mariala hesitated a moment on whether or not to follow and drag him back, he suddenly staggered back through on his own. His eyes were wide and fixed, and sticking from his chest and back were a score of thin wooden darts.

Without a sound he collapsed at her feet and expired.

“I don’t think we need to try that portal,” Mariala said faintly, kneeling to take the Khundari’s pulse, careful not to touch any of the almost certainly poisoned darts. “Toran, can we spin the wheel again? In case whoever did… this… decides to come through. Maybe we’ll get lucky…”

There was some discussion about whether the Paths all led to places on Novendo, or if they really did sometimes lead to other worlds or dimensions, as they took their places on the sigils. Or even other times, although Vulk maintained time travel was impossible. Still, how could they be sure?

The second attempt to shift the Paths of Gheas at first seemed no more promising than the previous, until Erol stepped through the fourth portal. He was gone longer than usual, and Devrik and Vulk were preparing to follow him, when he stepped back through.

“I think this one might be our best bet yet,” he said. “It’s early evening, so it should be on the same side of the world as us. The stars are familiar, but seem shifted – I’d say it’s significantly south of home, but not in the southern hemisphere. And it is grassland as far as the eye can see. There’s an encampment maybe two kilometers away, on a slight rise, I could see their campfires.”

“That sounds like if could be the great steppes called the Sun Plains that lie along the southern reaches of Ysgareth,” Mariala said, a hint of optimism in her tone. Erol nodded in agreement. “The Sea of Storms lies to the south, the Hellstorch Mountains to the west, Tur Kovan to the east… and the Garlini horsemen could be a problem… but depending on exactly where this portal is, civilization could be only 100 leagues away, maybe less!”

“Assuming this is really the Sun Plains,” Devrik frowned. “How can we be sure? And what risks are we willing to take to get home?”

And so the debate began…

Aftermath of the Frog of Insanity

The Hand returned to Zurhan in the mid-afternoon of 21 Sarnia, and immediately reported to the Chancellor and Master Vetaris on the bizarre events around Hart’s Lodge. The King was indisposed just then, but the Chancellor assured them he would pass on the full report. He also reported that their interrogation of the Darikazi slaver/spies that Erol and Mariala had captured, the few that had survived, had yielded very little.

“The most we’ve learned is that they were based in Gevdan Town,” the Chancellor reported with a sigh. “And that one, possibly two, of their number remained behind.

“As grateful as we are that you exposed them, I could wish you’d left rather more of them alive. Only two of the survivors were actual Darikazi; the rest were merely locally flunkies who knew almost nothing.”

“The Korönians were never going to give up easily,” an unrepentant Erol shrugged. “We really had no choice, they seemed determined not to be taken alive.”

Mariala looked at her friend with a raised eyebrow, but said nothing. At that moment a knock at the door interrupted the conversation. A courier from Kar Gevdan had arrived with an urgent message for the Baron’s nephew and his friends.

It seemed that some strange going-ons had been occurring in the town below the castle. Strange animals had appeared in the streets, there were reports of ghosts and even the dead rising up, and several people had gone missing. Lord Tynal’s own men had investigated, but aside from killing a few stray beasts, including a silver-back bear, had been able to learn nothing… aside from a strong desire to avoid the Low Town, apparently.

The Devrik’s cousins were with the army, preparing for the spring campaign, so the Baron wondered if his nephew and his boon companions might be free to come and investigate themselves… it seemed very much in their wheelhouse. He reported that Raven and his grand-nephew were fine, nothing uncanny had yet penetrated the castle, bur they missed Devrik.

“I had been preparing to send my own investigators to pursue this matter of the Darikazi,” the Chancellor said, looking thoughtful as Vulk finished reading the message (Devrik had handed it off to his friend to read aloud, once he’d perused it himself). “If it is your intention to accede to Baron Gevdan’s request, might I impose upon you once again? If you could look into this matter of the remaining spies at the same time, the Crown would be grateful…”

“We’d be happy to find the remaining slavers,” Erol said before anyone else could reply. “I assume we’re going, right Devrik?”

“Well, I’m going of course,” the warrior-mage growled. “I’d appreciate the rest of you coming, of course, but I know it’s been a tough several days…”

“Oh, of course we’re coming with you,” Vulk said, to the nods and murmured agreement of the others. “The Hand sticks together, after all!”

“But I assume we won’t be haring off this evening,” Mariala added with a hard look at Devrik. She knew his obsessiveness when it came to any danger to his family, however remote. “So I suggest we find ourselves a decent meal and then retire early. An early start will get us to Kar Gevdan with plenty of time to investigate.”

Devrik agreed with a grunt and a shrug… he had been planning on leaving at once, but his friend was right. It would be well after dark before he could arrive, and there seemed little enough danger to his family… and he knew his uncle was fully capable of protecting them, if it came to it.

As the Hand departed the royal castle to find a decent inn for a hot meal, Maser Vetaris accompanied them as far as Execution Square, filling them in on his own activities and the Council’s plans for the upcoming campaign to mop up the last of the late, but not lamented, Laravad’s mercenary forces.

Vox has proved very capable on the last mission upon whichI sent him, spying out enemy positions in the west,” the older man concluded. “I’ve asked him to travel with the army for now, so he may not rejoin you for awhile.”

With that he waved them on to food, suggesting the Ample Eel as a good choice, and turned to make his way to the Ukalus embassy he was calling home these days. The Hand took his suggestion, and agreed that it was, indeed, a fine choice… Haplo tried not to think of it as a last meal, but who knew what the ‘morrow would bring?

Cult of the Dol’Gurthog, Frog of Insanity

It was a lovely early spring day when the Hand set out from Zhuran, the sixth such day in a row the region had enjoyed. But pleasant as that was after the harsh winter, the resultant thawing had left the kingdom’s roads a muddy, gluey mess. The main road south was no exception, and they made poor time as a result – despite setting out an hour before noon, it was well after dark before the group arrived in the town of Ondazel, 25 km away.

Dor Ondazel was the keep long charged with guarding the southern approaches to the capital, and possessed of some of the best-maintained fortifications in the kingdom. For three years prior to his coup, it had been held by Crown Prince Laravad as Constable, a post his father had hoped would steady and calm his increasingly wild and erratic son. But Laravad had become, if anything, even more unstable, eventually using the keep as the focal point of his plot against his father, replacing the veteran soldiers of its garrison with his own creatures.

Now the keep was back in King Balen’s hands, the traitorous younger knights and mercenary soldiers rooted out and a new Constable assigned to oversee the rebuilding of the garrison. Ser Barot Atlar, a Knight of Tanar and married to a distant cousin of the king, greeted the Hand with courtesy and a hot meal. He had remained loyal to the king during the usurpation, leading a group of men and women in a guerrilla campaign from the nearby Verduth Woods. During the meal he was happy to tell his guests all he knew of the area and of the former prince’s infamous hunting lodge.

Hart’s Lodge was by far Laravad’s favorite place,” he said as a servant passed around the table pouring the port that ended the meal. “He visited it every month for years, in hunting season or out… for all his passion for the hunt, it was passing strange, I always thought. Even as his madness grew, and his plots were set in motion, he always found time to visit for at least a day or two, and often held meetings there with his chief lieutenants.

“In fact, I and my little band of merry loyalists had some thought of ambushing and seizing the traitor on one of these visits – they were almost like clockwork, which made the prospect very tempting. But once his coup had succeeded, he never travelled without a large and well-armed party of his mercenaries and suborned knights around him. So close to the edges of the Porgos Marsh there is little high land or natural ambush points, and the one attempt we made proved futile when the usurper’s party took an unexpected detour… almost as if they anticipated us.

“Well, we never had a chance to make a second attempt, thanks to your timely intervention this past Kristala Va,” he raised his glass in salute. “Since then, the lodge has remained empty and abandoned… I can’t imagine His Majesty, nor the Crown Princess, has any desire to make use of the place, and I suspect it will be allowed to fall into ruin. A pity for the nearby village that supported it, of course, but there’s little help for it. Frankly, that’s probably where this talk of “disappearances” comes from – folks simply recognizing the inevitable and moving on to greener pastures. The kingdom is still in such a roil, it’s a good time to make such changes I should think!”

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

The next morning the Hand, although having less distance to travel, nevertheless set out at an early hour, after a hearty breakfast served up by Ser Barot’s servants. By early afternoon they reached the small village that took it’s name from the royal hunting lodge, which itself lay a further two kilometers into the forest. Almost immediately it was obvious that something was terribly wrong.

The village consisted of more than 30 buildings, mostly homes, several with business occupying the lower floor. Apple trees abounded, just beginning to bud, and it should have been a charming scene. But, while smoke drifted lazily up into the pale blue sky from many chimneys, the streets seemed abandoned. No one could be seen moving outside, no one gathered at the well in the center of the village, and no one worked the small garden plots or grazing pastures nearby. And something else… it took a moment before they realized that the usual cacophony of bird sounds, ever-present in the countryside, was entirely missing.

The uncanny feeling was only deepened when the group, entering the village proper, was assaulted by the stomach-turning stench of rotting flesh. The sudden fear that the villagers had all been murdered was eased, if not completely erased, by the sight of mutilated and gore-covered corpses of sheep and pigs all around – in pens and yards, some in the very streets. Covering their mouths and noses with scarves or handkerchiefs, they paused in the village common, near the common well, to ponder their next move.

Furtive eyes peered out at them from between slats of closed shutters in the upper windows of a few houses, and eventually Vulk sent Jeb to go knock on the door of one such. His first knock elicited no response from within. He knocked again, more forcefully, and called out “Halloo the house! Is any one home? We are–”

“Go away!” screamed a frightened male voice suddenly. “Leave us alone, for the love of Alea!”

“Please, don’t hurt our children!” sobbed another voice, female, followed by the muffled crying of at least a couple of children. Jeb was taken aback by this response, and took several involuntary steps back, looking over at Vulk in puzzlement.

Not inclined to force their way into the obviously terrified peasant’s home, Mariala instead reached out with her arcane senses, heightened by casting Deana’s Perception. She almost reeled from the resulting wash of horror, fear and overwhelming terror that flowed over her. Staggering back a step herself, she quickly ended the spell.

“Dear Shala, these people are deeply, deeply afraid,” she told the others, rubbing her temples. “It’s not clear what has traumatized them so… not exactly… but clearly our presence is exacerbating it.”

The party decided to head the rest of the way through the settlement, to see if they could find anyone out or at least figure out which home was the village reeve’s, the man who’d sent the requests for help. As they left the common and turned south on the largest of the village’s five roads, they finally caught their first sight of someone actually out-of-doors.

At the end of the road a man had his back to them, apparently intent on carving something into the wall of one of the larger houses in the settlement. A common peasant by his clothes, the man seemed oblivious to their approach, muttering unintelligibly to himself, until they were about 5 meters away. Devrik cleared his throat to speak, and the man whirled around with a snarl. Everyone froze in horror.

The left side of the man’s face was a pustulant mass of slimy green scar tissue, out of which erupted half a dozen writhing tentacles of various sizes. His left eye was missing, the socket filled with a gelatinous blue substance,  and within its depths a shadowy shape appeared to be… swimming. But more ghastly than his face was his right arm. The hand had been severed and the flesh of the forearm stripped entirely away, its bones sharpened into vicious double points. Bloody rags encircled the upper arm, where the flesh remained, and the smell of putrefaction was strong.

He appeared to have been using the sharpened bone ends to carve mysterious glyphs into the plaster wall of the house.

His one good eye glared at them, ringed in bloodshot white, the pupil fully dilated. Movements jerky, almost spastic, he lunged forward, bone arm extended, shrieking in a voice like finger nails on slate “Sacrifices for the Dol’Gurthog!”

Devrik drew his battlesword, Erol and Toran drew arrow and bolt, Korwin reached for his cutlass, and the others began to prepare spells – but it was Vulk who acted first. Leveling his staff at the lumbering figure he spoke a low word. The green resin ovoid at its head flared and glowing white strands of writhing energy erupted from it.

The Weaver’s Web spell engulfed the gibbering creature (Vulk could hardly think of it as a man), the countless ends of its milky strands attaching to the walls of the house. In seconds the man was ensnared in a glowing web of energy, immobilized completely, despite his thrashing and shrieking, in the “L” formed by the two wings of the house.

The Hand stared at the struggling thing and at one another. For a moment, no one spoke. Even the strongest of them felt a queasy, unpleasant roiling in the gut and the shivering goose-flesh of fear on their skin.

“I don’t recognize this script,” Mariala said at last, trying to shake off the feeling of creeping dread that was nibbling at the edges of her mind. Keeping a safe distance from the ensnared… individual… she peered at his unfinished carving.

“Maybe…” she cast a spell of understanding, but while the sounds the symbols represented swam clear to her mind’s ear, no meaning followed. Gibberish it might be, but her feeling of unease grew stronger the more she studied the jagged symbols… Erol, trying his own arcane methods of translation, had the same result. They both desisted quickly, looking at one another in consternation.

As they tried to explain to the others what they’d felt there came a series of answering calls to their prisoner’s continuing shrieks. The responding cries came from the woods beyond the village, and in moments several more cultists were rushing at the group from three directions.

Vulk immediately slipped into his link with Cherdon, the falcon already aloft and surveying the scene from above.  His attention was immediately drawn to the nearest threat, two men to the west moving from the woods into the narrow lane between two houses.

One man was equally as disfigured and brutalized as their first acquaintance, if in a different fashion – while he had his hand, the flesh on all his fingers had been stripped away and the bones sharpened to lethal claws. He had a chain around his neck, the other end of which was looped around the wrist of the other man. This fellow was somewhat better dressed, in robes of dark red and brown – although they were filthy with dirt and dried gore. There was no way to tell if his face, too, was disfigured, as it was covered by a crudely carved and painted frog mask. A necklace made of frog skeletons haphazardly woven together rattled at his neck, and the hand not holding the chain/leash appeared to be a single, massive tentacle.

Therok!” Vulk called urgently but quietly to his barbarian follower. “Go up over that roof and come down on the other side… two of these… men… are moving up between the houses. Get behind them and attack!”

The Firilani warrior nodded his acknowledgment, and with feline grace leapt atop the stack of barrels against the side of the house, and from there to the roof. In a moment he had scrambled up the shakes and vanished beyond the peak.

Erol, meanwhile, had moved to engage the first of the new arrivals as they stepped into the road – another disfigured, tentacle-faced monstrosity brandishing a flail. The weapon was made of bone and wood, its head a small human skull and the leather strands of the whips knotted with human teeth. When the madman opened his mouth to shriek “Sacrifices! Flesh for His spawn!” it became obvious where the teeth had come from.

Erol’s thrust his trident forward, taking the rushing figure in the chest, and bright red arterial blood gushed from both the savage wound and the man’s toothless mouth. Unfortunately, even as the man collapsed with a wet, gurgling death rattle, the flail whipped out and dug into Erol’s leg, just below the leather of his hauberk and above the plate of his kneecop. The leg gave out and he went down, teeth clenched in pain.

Toran, alerted by Cherdon through Vulk, was prepared for the frog-masked, dark-robed zealot that lurched out of the alley northwest of the group. The Khundari Shadow Warrior swung his battle-axe in a horizontal arc that should have intersected with the cultist’s chest – but with a speed and finesse that astonished the Dwarf the man brought up his brown-stained bone sword and turned the blade. In the return motion he attempted to slash Toran’s face, but the hero leaned back, easily avoiding the counterattack.

Mariala had, for a moment, wrestled with getting her cross-bow from where it hung down her back, cursing herself for not preparing it as soon as they’d entered the eerie village. But as another disfigured horror staggered into the roadway near her she gave up and grabbed one of her throwing knives from its wrist sheath. The black-bladed taburi flew out and buried itself deep into the creature’s chest. It collapsed, gurgled wetly, twitched twice… and died.

Once he had sent Therok off and warned the others of what was coming, Vulk immediately turned to prayer, silently chanting the ritual of Kasira’s Smile to bring down the Immortal Lady of Luck’s blessing on his friend Devrik. The fire mage felt the subtle tingling that he had come to associate with the blessing of the goddess, and his sword flamed to life at his murmured  summoning.

Haplo’s Karmic Missiles missed their intended target, but Korwin’s Ice Needle took the same cultist in the thorax, and the man collapsed, shrieking and grasping ineffectually at the spike of ice protruding from his chest. As the cultist collapsed Haplo rushed over to join Toran’s fight, while a pained grunt and the sound of flesh and bone striking wood drew the others’ attention to the wide alley to the west…

Therok had scuttled quickly across the roof of the house to the north, and dropped down behind the two cultists, as per Vulk’s instructions. Unfortunately, the element of surprise he’d expected to enjoy didn’t materialize – before he could do more than bring his sword up the dark-robed man whirled on him, his tentacle-arm whipping out with blinding speed. It slammed into the barbarian’s chest, sending him flying sideways almost two meters to crash into the wall of the house whose roof he’d just traversed.

With a grunt, as ribs broke and his skull slammed into the wall, Therok crumpled to the ground, unconscious and bleeding from nose and mouth. His demented attacker loomed over him, raising a bone sword in his scarred but human-looking right hand to deliver the killing blow. The cultist’s twisted features relaxed into a look of bewildered surprise, however, as three sharp tines of metal suddenly erupted from his chest. His own blood gushed forth as his eyes rolled upward and he collapsed bonelessly at the feet of his would-be victim.

Erol, levering himself up on his wounded leg, had seen the attack on his friend’s bodyguard, and knew no one was in a position to reach the fallen man in time. Instinctively he’d whipped his trident back and hurled it with all his strength and skill, taking the thing full in the back. The deformed creature it had held on the chain, suddenly freed from control, rushed headlong at Erol then, stripped-to-the-bone finger tips clawing for his face. The fighter drew his gladius just in time for the shrieking thing to impale itself on the blade.

Meanwhile, Toran and Haplo between them finally managed to put down the Rasputin-like cultist they faced, who simply would not die. Even after Haplo almost severed his hand, the raving madman merely passed out… but at that point even his stamina couldn’t survive a battle axe to the neck, as Toran was happy to demonstrate.

Mariala hit the last attacking cultist with a second thrown taburi, burying the blade in its shoulder. Devrik followed up with his flaming blade, nearly severing the man’s arm and then leaving him to bleed out in the dirt.

While Vulk rushed to tend to Therok’s near-fatal injuries, Erol pulled his own vial of Baylorium-7 from around his neck and dosed his injured knee. In a matter of minutes the gash had begun to knit together, and by the time he joined the others gathered around the one crazed villager who was still alive and conscious, struggling in Vulk’s webs, only a slight ache and a thin pale line remained.

During the sharp, brief fight, the demented cultist had been hacking at the bands of white energy that restrained him with his mutilated blade-like forearm, and several of the strands had actually parted. Thinking to put a stop to that before they tried to question the prisoner, Devrik whipped his sword up in a sudden slash that severed the man’s arm at the elbow.  Unfortunately, the blade was still flaming with Goraten’s Brand, and the magical webs turned out to be highly flammable…

As the writhing creature became engulfed in flames, its shrieks quickly tapered off along with its struggles, and Mariala pinched the bridge of her nose, casting a baleful glance at her old friend.

“It would have been nice to have at least one of these… things… alive to question,” she sighed, shaking her head in exasperation. “I hope you’re not planning on burn down the whole village – again.”

“No, it’s not my intention,” Devrik growled, returning the glare. “How was I to know the damn webs were so flammable.” He focused his pyrokinesis on the burning corpse, now collapsed to the ground as the last of the magical webbing vanished into smoke, and then reversed the usual flow of his power… the flames flickered out quickly and only the smell of seared flesh remained. The usual nauseating-appetizing pork-like smell of burned human flesh was underlain by a disturbing stench of fetid rot.

“This one’s still alive,” Erol said diffidently, gesturing to the leashed creature that had spitted itself on his short sword. But even as the others turned to look, the body gave a last shudder, a rattling sound escaped its throat, and it settled into the unmistakable stillness of death. Mariala sighed again, but before she could say anything further a sudden sharp crack caused everyone to wheel back around to the first body.

To the group’s horror, the burned cultist’s head was bulging grotesquely at the base of the skull. The corpse began to jerk and shudder as the bone cracked again, the bulge expanding… and then suddenly the whole back of the former villager’s head exploded outwards in a spray of bone, blood and brains. From the gaping hole a slimy shape lurched out into the pale sunlight, and everyone took one horrified step backward.

The creature was slightly smaller than an average bullfrog, to which it bore a passing resemblance – save for the shiny green-black skin visible through the blood and brain matter dripping off it, the four small tendrils waving from its head, and the dark, empty sockets where its eyes should have been.

It turned its blind gaze toward the group and as one Devrik, Erol, Toran and a still shaky but revived Therok all raised their weapons, while Mariala, Korwin and Haplo each began to gather energy for various spells. Jeb whipped an arrow from his quiver and nocked it to his bow as Vulk aimed his staff, prepared to unleash–

“Stop!” a quavering voice called out, as the door to the house before which all the action had taken place suddenly flew open. “Don’t kill it, for the love of the Immortals, don’t kill it!”

As the Hand stared in surprise, a short, round-bellied man of late-middle years dashed out of the doorway, a large metal wash basin clutched in his pudgy hands. Sidling skittishly around the smoking corpse on his doorstep, he bent down and slapped the container over the unresisting frog-thing. With a relieved sigh he stood up straight and smiled tentatively at the group.

“We need it alive, you see,” he said, as if continuing a conversation. “So that you can defeat the beast. It – it–” At their blank stares he stuttered to a stop and looked momentarily doubtful. “That is, assuming… I mean, you are here to kill the Dol’Gurthog… aren’t you?”

“What in the Void is a ‘Doll Girth Hog,’ and who the Void are you?” Haplo demanded. “And what the Void is going on in this cursed village?!”

The man looked momentarily taken aback, but he quickly gathered his obviously frayed nerves and made a slight bow, first toward the silver-haired illusionist and then to the group as a whole. “My name is Hal Neelow, sir, and I am the Reeve of Hart’s Lodge Village. As for what is going on here, and the Dol’Gurthog… well, those are much related, I’m afraid…”

The nervous little man then explained to the Hand as much as he could. The village had been under siege from these horrifying cultists for two months now – most of whom were actually former villagers. He assured the party that his fellow citizens, all of whom he’s know his whole life, would never harm a fly – but after the first cultists appeared, strangers to the village, people began wandering off into the woods, seemingly in a daze… and coming back as savage monsters who can no longer even be called human, as they’d just witnessed.

After a few days the missing villagers first began to return, and if they seemed a bit ‘off,’ they weren’t actually mad – not slicing-off-their-own-hands mad, anyway. In the beginning they just tried to recruit others to come with them, talking of enlightenment and joy. A few villagers actually followed them back into the woods. Later they, too, returned, if anything even more violent. Their minds apparently were deteriorating over time, withering away, breaking down what control they once possessed. Eventually they began demanding that more townsfolk go with them, or the entire village would face the consequences.

The people of Hart’s Lodge fought back that first time the demand was made… Five men were left dead and another four were dragged off into the forest. Reeve Neelow pointed to the man with bone claws, the chain leash still around his neck.

“That’s one of them that was taken in the first attack – Jerama Merrol. So now the people of the town are too terrified to fight… I sent off messengers to the Chancellory, begging for soldiers to come to our aid.

“And the next day the Learned Rythek, a master of the arcane arts who makes his home amongst us, followed the cultists into the woods, determined to confront the evil at its source. For all that he was a mere hedge-wizard, he was quite strong, especially with fire.” He gave a sidewise glance at Devrik, whose flaming sword had been re-sheathed after the Reeve had begun his tale. “But there’s been no word from him since.”

“A tenday past two of the King’s (may the All preserve him) men-at-arms arrived, and they went off into the woods as well. They were quite big, strapping fellows, and very sure they could handle some ‘damn frog worshippers,’ as they said… but we’ve not heard from them again, either.”

“So what exactly is this Dol’Gurthog,” Devrik asked impatiently. “Have you actually seen it?”

“Well, no, not myself,” Neelow replied, “but others have described it… A frog the size of a wagon with nothing but empty sockets where there should be eyes. Four massive tentacles extending out of its back, lashing out wildly for meters around it, and spikes of bone running down the length of its spine. A beast of nightmare, it seems to me… but those besotted by it seem to think it is glorious and the source of all bounty and goodness.”

“So, essentially a larger version of the frog-thing you’ve trapped under your wash basin,” Mariala stated, glancing dubiously at said kitchen implement. “Why is it so important that we not kill the creature?”

“Because I’ve seen this happen before,” the reeve replied. “One of them emerging from the head of a cultist and all. That um, frog, hopped off into the forest, going back to its progenitor I believe. If you were to follow the creature, it should lead you to the very root of this evil…” He paused again, doubt and desperation warring on his round face.

“You are agents of the King, are you not?” he asked again, almost pleading. “Sent to succor us in this terrible time, in response to my second messenger?”

“Yes, yes,” Vulk assured him gently. “We are indeed sent by the King and his advisors to sort all this out. Have no fear, the Hand is here.”

♦ ♦ ♦

It was eventually decided that the village reeve’s plan was, in fact, the best they could come up with under the circumstances, lacking any actual living cultists to act as guide. No further deranged people emerged from the woods, so following the baby frog-thing it would be.

Reeve Neelow having retreated to the relative safety of his home after securing the groups horses in his stable, Erol lifted the sieve off the creature, which had remained silently unperturbed by its brief imprisonment, and the Hand stared down at it expectantly. The thing seemed to have almost doubled in size during its brief captivity, which was disturbing in and of itself.

After a moment of staring sightlessly back at its liberators, the frog-thing gave a deep croak and suddenly leaped forward, heading down the road toward the wood’s edge.

“Maybe we should put a… a harness, or something, on it,” Erol suggested, and reached down to pick the creature up before it could get too far away. But Haplo put a restraining hand on his arm.

“I wouldn’t touch that thing with a bare hand,” he said, frowning. ” Some frogs can secrete toxins through their skin, I’ve heard, and given what we know about this little monster… well, I shouldn’t think it worth the risk.”

“I agree,” said Mariala. “Given the rate it seems to be growing, I’m not sure we could keep a harness on it anyway. Besides, it’s not moving that fast, we shouldn’t have any trouble keeping up with it.”

She proved correct, and the frog-thing seemed to be perfectly happy to follow the rutted track that led westward into the woods, in the general direction of the royal hunting lodge – which meant the Hand didn’t have to scramble through the underbrush to follow it. The creature seemed to have no trouble avoiding any obstacles in its path, despite its lack of eyes, and occasionally the tendrils atop its head would lash out at insects, pulling them into its mouth to be devoured.

Despite the pleasant spring day, the woods were gloomy and nerve-wracking… shadows seemed to stretch longer than they should, and to be deeper, the flowers in the understory smelled foul rather than sweet, and not a single woodland creature was anywhere to been seen. Like the village, no sound of birdsong could be heard, and the silence was both eerie and unnerving. Cherdon, flying low over their heads, was the only other thing moving.

After some 15 minutes of steady travel the unnatural monstrosity had again almost doubled in size, and its leaps were becoming longer… though its pursuers had no trouble keeping up. It continued with a swift and confident determination, and as they all moved deeper into the woods the party began noticing disturbing things… strips of human flesh nailed to trees with spikes of bone… remnants of scattered fire pits, visible off the path, appeared to contain scorched bones, both animal and human… and at last some birds. But these sat in the trees, unmoving, eyeless, and giving out low sounds of anguish rather than pleasant chirps – the sound seemed almost taunting.

Another ten minutes brought them all to a fork in the road. The main path bent sharply to the left, while a narrower and partially overgrown track led straight on. The frog-thing took the narrower path, but as they came to the bend the party was stopped by sudden movement to their left.

Ten meters down the main road two cultists were hunched over the carcass of an enormous elk laid out in the roadway. One man had a needle and thread and the other held a vicious looking bone saw. The cultists turned to stare at the group as they came into view, and both dropped their tools to draw weapons. One grabbed an executioner’s axe while the other took up a sort of club with rib bones shoved through the wood, forming sharp spikes.

With a staggering, bucking motion the dead deer stood up as well.

The horrifying monstrosity stood over two meters tall at the shoulder. An open wound in its side revealed where some ribs had been removed – apparently the same ribs now sewn along its back to form a set of curving spikes. Its antlers were sharpened to jagged points and its eyes, while still intact, appeared to be bleeding. There were distinct wounds and stitches around the deer’s back legs… almost as if they had been hacked off and then hastily reattached. The revenant corpse was partially covered in a dark-blue slimy substance, and even at this distance the smell was strong, and foul.

With inarticulate shouts, the taxidermist cultists raised their weapons and rushed the party, their undead class project lumbering behind. Before they had moved more than a couple of meters, however, Erol had loosed a single shaft from his longbow. It plunged deep into the monstrous elk’s chest and through the heart it apparently still had… and needed. The beast crashed down with an impact that everyone felt in their feet and lay there, its legs twitching spasmodically.

At the same time that Erol was letting the grey goose fly Mariala and Haplo were unleashing their own arcane attacks. As the undead elk crashed to the ground behind them the two cultists were struck almost simultaneously by Fire Nerves and Mokel’s Karmic Missiles. Their jerking spasms and shrieks of pain caused by the first spell were almost instantly stilled as the invisible bolts of the second slammed into them. They fell like puppets with their strings cut.

It was all over so quickly that Vulk, who had continued to follow the baby frog-spawn, and Devrik, who had followed Vulk to keep him safe, were still in sight down the narrower track. After a desultory search of the dead cultists, which yielded nothing more interesting than a few coins and a crude sketchbook, the others hurried to catch up.

Mariala and Korwin studied the sketchbook, and passed it on to the others as they continued deeper in to the increasingly wrong-feeling woods. The pictures in the book were all charcoal renderings of a monstrous frog, with empty eye sockets, clawed feet, and waving tendrils snaking from its head. In the early pages the drawings were actually quite good, but as they progressed the images became cruder, more simplistic. The last sketch was so abstract that it could be construed as the Dol’Gurthog only by context.

Looking though the book only deepened the oppressive disquiet everyone felt as they moved deeper into the woods. No one objected when Korwin pocketed the book after everyone had seen it. What the Void, he thought, maybe he could publish it back in the Empire, perhaps as illustrations to his recounting of this adventure… suitably edited, of course… this sort of macabre shit sold big back home, in certain circles.

♦ ♦ ♦

Another half hour of steady walking at last brought the Hand to what seemed to be their destination – a massive cavern entrance set into a low, treeless hill that rose like an island from the forest. Stalagmites and stalactites lined the mouth of the cave, giving it the appearance of a snarling maw. The skeletons of hundreds, perhaps thousands, of frogs littered the ground in front of the opening.

Their own amphibious guide hopped toward the entrance without slowing, and vanished within.

“Maybe we should’ve killed that thing before it went in,” Erol muttered, but it was already too late, and none of his companions replied.

As they approached the entrance themselves, the group stopped suddenly in their tracks, almost as one. A delightful smell wafted out of the cave, making all of their salivary glands suddenly start working overtime. The odor was utterly alluring, yet impossible to identify precisely… it seemed to hit all the pleasure centers in the brain, evoking memories of baking cookies at Grandmother’s, holiday roasts turning on the spit, savory mushrooms fresh from the farming caves, brillberry wine fermenting in the cellar, clams hot from the coals… it smelled like all of these things and like none of them.

Half entranced by the smell, the group stepped into the cavern, where the same blue slime they’d seen on the cultists in the village and on the zombie elk in the woods coated the walls, flowing down as if oozing from the very stone. It seemed to be the source of the magnificent smell, and the urge to run a hand through it and then lick it off one’s fingers was almost irresistible. Almost.

It looks more like blueberry jam, Mariala thought. Just like old Nan used to make when I was a child. She’d baked it into the most delectable tarts… Mariala could smell them baking right now, in fact, and she longed for that innocent, beloved taste of childhood… she reached out for the wall and the beautiful blue jam…

Devrik was torn from his own reverie, of roasting venison and the sour cherry reduction that had covered it each Höl Kopia before he’d been sent off to the chantry, by the sight of his friend reaching out to touch the dripping slime. He hastily grabbed her wrist, pulling her back and speaking her name sharply. For a moment she stared at him, her eyes blank and glassy, then she frowned and shook her head.

“I’m… alright,” she said, pulling her arm from his grip and shaking her head as if to clear it. “By Shala, I really was going to eat that! Ugh!” She looked slightly green and she shuddered. While it still smelled wonderful, the spell was broken and she no longer had any desire to put the stuff in her mouth!

“Thank you Devrik,” she said, patting her companion on the shoulder. “That could have been… unpleasant.”

“No problem,” Devrik rumbled. “And I think we all need to keep an eye out for each other, and not just for enemies… pair up and make sure your buddy doesn’t try to taste that crap. Whatever it smells like, there’s no way it leads to anything good!”

Everyone agreed, with the exception of Haplo, who, a look of fascinated anticipation on his face, was reaching out to run his own finger though the goo even as Devrik spoke. Fortunately, Korwin was close enough to stop him before he could succeed, and after a sharp shake Haplo, too, snapped out of his trance and felt the urge to eat the horrible stuff subside. Despite the lingering scent of positive-reinforcement-memories in the air, no one else seemed terribly tempted to lick the walls after that.

The group continued cautiously into the cave. The initial cave, beyond the opening,  was over seven meters wide. Painted on the walls beyond the blue slime were various depictions of the monstrous Dol’Gurthog, primarily in white paint. But the void where the being’s eyes should be used some darker pigment… dried blood, as it turned out on closer examination.

The cave narrowed quickly as it led further into the hill, and downward. Rarely more than two meters wide, the descending pathway wound lazily and was lit by flickering torches mounted periodically along the walls. Whispers seemed to echo around them, with no distinguishable origin.

More of the strange blue slime began to appear, coating the walls in wide patches. Fortunately, the appetizing smell was no more compelling than it was near the surface and the urge to consume it was no longer strong. After traveling down a narrow path for a score of meters the way turned into a series of winding natural stairs which opened up into a large, roughly “L” shaped chamber.

In the center of this area, between four slender pillars topped with carved frog capitals, sat an enormous, if crudely realized, statue of the Dol’Gurthog. While not well crafted, the emotion that the artist was attempting to capture was clear – madness, deep and utter. Aside from the feelings it evoked, the most notable part of the statue were the two massive jet gemstones  set into the empty eye sockets.

Around the walls of the space the party noticed furtive movements in the shifting shadows cast by the few torches that lit the area. This quickly resolved into 30 or more large albino squirrels, scattered about the space and eating from various pools of the blue slime that formed near the walls. They seemed calm and docile, and some ran across the floor, large red eyes faintly glowing in the torchlight, as they curiously examined the visitors.

As the group made no hostile move, a few of the small creatures came hesitantly forward, sniffing warily at their clothes. One ran up Jeb’s leg and torso to perch on his shoulder, and began examining his hair. The youth was clearly freaked out, but before he could decide what to do Therok had stepped up and plucked the squirrel from him. He set it chitttering on the floor, and it ran off to join a knot of companions.

“If one of those things tries to climb up me, I’m Fire Nerving the lot of them!” Mariala said nervously, eyeing the milling crowd of subterranean rodents. While not mice or rats, the albino squirrels were close enough to set her musophobia to a hair trigger. Keeping a wary eye on the creatures, she made sure her back was to an empty section of wall.

Toran began examining the walls of the cavern, eventually coming to a bronze-bound door of black ironwood at the bottom a narrow sloped passage. The door was locked, with only a smallish hole in the center of the panel, and neither his lock-picking skills nor his magic key had any luck opening it. Half a dozen of the albino squirrels gathered around him to watch his attempts with apparent fascination.

Korwin scouted out the exit to the north and east, going only few steps down the narrow passage before retuning to the statue chamber, while Devrik, suppressing disturbing memories of Taloxta going for his eyes in another cavern, moved to examine the statue. As he did so, he noticed that the alluring smell was hardly noticeable any more… indeed, he had to strain to smell anything besides musty, wet stone.

Must have finally gotten used to it, he thought as, keeping a wary eye on his furry audience, he cast Goraten’s Brand, lighting up his battle sword with comforting yellow flames. As he examined the crude statue in the better light of his flaming weapon, he realized that a new smell was making itself noticed – a foul smell, as of putrefying flesh and rotting vegetation. As the stench grew, his tension ratcheted upwards, and he felt suddenly uneasy and angry… had his flames caused this terrible smell? Was it coming from the statue?

He poked experimentally at the ugly sculpture with the tip of his sword – and as if that were some sort of signal, every squirrel in the room suddenly burst into frenzied action. With a mad chittering they attacked whomever was nearest, running up clothes, leaping from niches in the wall, biting and clawing at exposed skin.

For a moment it seemed that sheer surprise would allow the swarming rodents to overrun the group, but the tide was quickly turned. True to her word, with a shriek of fear-fueled rage Mariala sent a wave of Fire Nerve energy fanning out across half the room and eleven of the attacking rodents fell writhing in agony to the stone floor. She kicked and stomped the ones nearest her to bloody pulp, and plucked one surviving creature from her hair to fling it across the chamber in disgust.

Therok and Jeb, having been more-or-less out of the initial attack by being still on the stairs, rushed down and began dispatching the writhing, chittering victims of the Fire Nerve spell, and then stomping or spitting any others that came near.

Erol, having dropped his trident when several of the albino vermin had sunk their teeth into his wrist, took to pulling them off himself and smashing them against the nearest wall. He also followed Mariala’s lead and began stomping the ones underfoot into paste until he could retrieve his trident, at which point it became a game of spit-and-hurl.

Vulk attempted to invoke Kasira’s Smile, but whatever foul power held sway in this place seemed to block his access to the Lady’s blessing. With a grimace he began to lay about him with his staff, sending vermin flying with each blow, breaking legs, backs and skulls.

Toran cast Fist of Kuhan on himself, and as his arms began to harden into mace-like strength and durability he merrily worked his way back up from the locked door to the main chamber, smashing albino squirrels right and left as he went.

Korwin’s hastily summoned Frost Blade allowed him to slay several of the insanely attacking vermin, and kept the rest of them at bay while Haplo’s invisible karmic arrows impaled three of the hoard. Both men stomped a few more into ruin for good measure.

Most of the remaining albino squirrels were incinerated by Devrik’s Orb of Voral, and as their smoldering corpses twitched on the smoking stone of the floor, the few survivors skittered away into the shadows.

The brief Battle of the Squirrel Temple had lasted less than a minute, but it left the group shaken and on edge, their nerves frayed and tempers short. Matters weren’t made better by the overpowering stench that now filled the air. While no longer getting stronger, the miasma showed no sign of abating, either.

Mariala attempted to cast Feel on both the statue and the door, but achieved little more than a pounding headache and the sense of powerful, chaotic, almost alien magic permeating everything around them. Unable to open the locked door, the group continued on through the northern exit.

Another 15 minutes passed as they moved slowly through the dimly lit, twisting passages, and as they did the stench began to slowly fade. The removal of the horrible odor lifted everyone’s spirits just by its absence, and by the time they arrived at a curtained doorway the pleasant smell of all things delicious had begun to fill the air again. As they pushed through into the chamber beyond, everyone was feeling optimistic and upbeat.

The new chamber appeared to be a living area. A rotting bed, with a nightstand nearby and a small chest at its foot lay at one end of the room. On the nightstand was a candle and a small green dragon statue. Closer to hand a pile of mostly decayed scrolls was visible on and around a battered desk – at least twenty scrolls in total – and uncomfortable-looking chair.  A moldering deer-skin rug lay in the center of the room and scraps of cloth were scattered around the room.

But what immediately caught their attention, just to the right of the entrance, was a man sitting against the wall and gazing up at the ceiling as if it were a night sky filled with stars, or perhaps a fireworks display. Dressed in soiled but still serviceable robes he possessed a long, grey beard and gnarled hands. He didn’t appear to be sliced up or otherwise mutilated like so many of the other cultists they’d encountered… but there was a madness, nevertheless, behind his gaze.

Stepping forward Toran, his battle-axe lowered but at the ready, cleared his throat. The man’s head snapped down and whipped to the left, his bloodshot eyes going wide as he stared at the party as if they were phantasms.

“Guests!” he gasped out suddenly… and in apparent delight, a smile lighting his face. “Here to see the Master, no doubt?” he asked, using a gnarled staff that had been leaning against the wall next to him to lever himself stiffly to his feet. “You have heard His call and seek to give yourself into His embrace, yes?”

The man was clearly mad, but it seemed a very manic sort of insanity, and his enthusiasm was almost disarming. Compared to the other cultists they’d met so far, he seemed almost normal, if a trifle eccentric. He stared expectantly at the group, his gaze moving hopefully from face to face.

Small flames flickered occasionally between the fingers of his right hand, something he seemed completely unconscious of, like a deeply ingrained habit…

“Er, yes,” Vulk said, stepping forward, his own magnificent staff held slightly forward. “We have indeed heard a call, and have come here to learn what it means… who is your Master, and who are you?”

“Oh, I am the Keymaster,” the old man chuckled as if at a great joke. “Yes, or the Keyholder… though some still call me Rythek, my name from before my Enlightenment and being granted my holy task…”

At which point he pulled a small book from his robes, one that seemed to be bound in leather made from human flesh, and reading from it went off on a rant about his deep love for the Dol’Gurthog and his “god’s” unsurpassed magnificence. Eventually, however, Vulk was able to bring him back around to the whole Keymaster/Keyholder subject.

“Ah, well, you see…” he began, tucking away his horrid book in the folds of his robe. “There is a special key to open the Inner Sanctum, allowing entry into the Holy Presence itself. The Dol’Gurthog, in His infinite wisdom, has made me His Keymaster, solemnly  charged with the duty of seeing that only those worthy of His radiant presence, those able to endure his puissant power without dying, may pass within.

“To do this, He has created a puzzle of sorts… to test the strength of mind of those who would worship Him. The Dol’Gurthog wishes to have only those who are strong of mind, who will not crumble so easily before his glorious presence, come before him. This room contains all of the clues you will need to get through the door behind me.” He gestured at a closed door set in the north wall of the room. Glowing numbers appeared to be etched into its surface: 5612469 2 23015.

“Just say the password and it will open for you… then down in the pit, amongst the playful Children, you will find the key to the Inner Sanctum.” He smiled widely then, and for the first time his teeth were visible. All had been filed down to needle-like points. He gestured again, this time at the wider room, encouraging them to begin the search for clues…

The group spent some time examining everything in the room, which contained scores of items from the mundane to the arcane, including such esoterica as: a commemorative platter on the liberation of Tharkia;  an ornate Lirilalian Carnivale mask, in red and gold metallic foil over leather; a silver-plated gauntlet set with six multi-colored glass gems; a crystal punch bowl and seven small glasses; an onyx statuette of a panther; and a great many musty books.

In the end the group narrowed their focus to three items that seemed of particular interest, as they were the only three items with numbers written on them in some fashion. First, the carved jade statuette of a green dragon from the nightstand had the numbers 412 7142 scrawled on a piece of parchment glued to the underside of its base.

“Ah yes, the very inspiration for the cypher,” Rythek said with a fond sigh of reminiscence as soon as Devrik had picked it up. “Where it all began… the clever green dragon.”

The second item was the small chest, or footlocker, at the foot of Rythek’s bed. When Korwin opened it and began shifting through the odd little “treasures” within (frog skeletons, strips of human flesh, bone dice – the usual sorts of things one would expect to find, really), Rythek again spoke up. “Oh yes, my treasures, my collection of beautiful things… please make sure they remain within my treasure chest.”

As Korwin turned to stare at the demented arcanist standing at his back his eye caught the numbers scrawled in dried blood on the inside of the chest’s lid: 6151 8956. Making note of it, he gently shut the lid, leaving the “treasures” undisturbed within.

The last item was a seemingly mundane broom that Toran found in a nook after he had finished a fruitless examination the pile of rotting scrolls around the old desk. The implement seemed nothing special, and Rythek offered no musings on it when the Khundari picked it up, but the numbers 013 were etched deeply into the broom’s handle.

The Hand wrangled the problem about for awhile, and to Mariala’s chagrin it was Devrik who first realized it was a simple substitution cypher that used only the consonants, ignoring vowels altogether. To Devrik’s chagrin it was Korwin who actually decoded the password first, blurting out the phrase “strength in numbers” before the fire mage could.

Rythek looked inordinately pleased, and clapped his hands together in child-like glee as the door in the north wall popped open with an audible ‘snick’ of a bolt releasing. There seemed to be a glimmer of true happiness behind the madness in his eyes.

“Now you need only retrieve the Key, the Eye of God, from its resting place amongst His Children,” he said, flashing his sharklike smile once more and gesturing them on toward the now open door. With a communal sigh, the Hand filed through the narrow doorway…

♦ ♦ ♦

Beyond the doorway was an equally narrow stairwell that descended another six meters. At the bottom the group found themselves on a stone platform with a drop of at least another seven meters into a pit of darkness. From within the darkness the croaking of hundreds of frogs could be heard, and the slithery, wet sounds of amphibian skins rubbing together.

The darkness was utterly impenetrable, pierced by neither torchlight nor spells nor rituals. Hoping there was another way to accomplish their goal, they searched beyond the platform area, but the only other thing to be found was a small chamber to the northeast that contained thousands of squirming maggots and the hunks of rotting meat that hosted them. Even the alluring smell of the blue slime could barely counteract the stench when actually inside the chamber.

Retreating back to the pit of darkness, Korwin had the brilliant idea of trying his glowstone bullseye lantern. To everyone’s surprise, it worked, actually piercing the uncanny blackness at the bottom of the pit. It revealed a writhing mass of juvenile frog-things, much like the one they had followed into this nightmarish cave complex, crawling over one another in a shallow pool of black water. To the left a narrow, crumbling set of natural stairs led down to the pools edge.

Toran produced the Cord of Qorelia-Sym, the magic Telnori rope he carried for Vulk, and tied one end around his waist. Korwin and Erol tied the other end around themselves, and began their descent into the pit as the Dwarf cast Joining of Merkünon on himself, causing his feet to become temporarily welded fast to the stone floor.

At the bottom Korwin cast a ball of freezing energy into the center of the squirming mass of frog-things, hoping to at least slow them down, but the additional cold seemed to have little effect on them… it didn’t even freeze the water he noted with consternation.

After considering his options for a moment, Korwin heaved a sigh and slid off the last step and into the icy, calf-deep water and thigh-deep scrum of squirming amphibians. The creatures didn’t seem to react to him, and after a moment, with Erol shining the light from the lantern around, he began reaching into the mass of wriggling flesh to feel for the Key.

The light proved to be less useful than one might’ve expected, and after almost two minutes of fruitless groping amongst the frog-things even Korwin was beginning to go numb from the penetrating cold. Then his fingers brushed against something not living flesh nor rough stone – something smooth and curved. He groped back, found it again, and closed his fist around it.

Opening his fist in the beam from the lantern Korwin and Erol saw a glass sphere the size of a large plum, greenish-black with an iris of virulent yellow and a slit-like pupil of pure black flecked with gold. The Eye of God, obviously, and their key into the Inner Sanctum.

♦ ♦ ♦

Once they had dried and warmed Korwin as best they could under the circumstances the Hand had returned to Rythek’s chamber and presented him with the Key. He had merely smiled his needle-like smile at them and waved them on.

“Back to the Outer Temple,” he’d chuckled, beaming in pride at their accomplishment. “Now you can open the way, and soon you will join us and be as one in the Dol’Gurthog… if not in His heart, then at least in His belly.”

On that unnerving note, the group headed back to the site of the albino squirrel massacre and the magically locked door that had previously barred their passage. Fortunately no more of the demented rodents had yet repopulated the chamber, and they passed unmolested.

Toran took the Eye of God and inserted it into the round slot in the center of the door. With a ‘thunk’ the glass sphere dropped out of sight, and then a flurry of clicks, whirring and clanks followed. In a few seconds there was a louder ‘ker-chunk’, as of a massive bolt withdrawing, and the door swung inward.

Beyond the doorway was another narrow flight of twisting, uneven stairs. They descended steeply some eight meters, over a span of perhaps 20 meters, to open out into the largest cavern the group had yet seen in the complex. The dim light from a score of torches, spaced erratically around the wall, reflected off the black, glassy surface of a large body of dark water that filled much of the center of the space. A smaller pool of equally still, black water lay off to the left, beyond the larger lake.

On the far side of the chamber, in a large natural alcove or bay, the Hand could see a collection of tables, shelves, what looked like a rack, a large glass aquarium, and a stone basin with a large fire burning in it. Three robed and cowled figure were moving about purposefully, obviously engaged in some arcane job of work. They made no sign that they were aware of the groups entrance into the cavern.

As the group slowly made their way around the dark lake several of the adventurers noticed four largish lumps rising from the black water near its northern end. It was Vulk who realized, with a shock, that they were the dark brow ridges, and empty eye sockets, of two enormous, monstrous frogs, apparently at rest beneath the water.

“They must be two-and-a-half meters tall, if they’re to scale with those, um, eyes” he whispered to the others as he quietly pointed out the beasts. As the group moved past them the glass-like surface of the lake was disturbed by small ripples as the giant amphibious heads turned to follow their progress.

As they rounded the end of the lake one of the cultists finally noticed their approach and stepped forward to hail them. “Who are you? I don’t know your faces… what is your business here?” His voice was cracked and not a little mad-sounding, but friendly enough for all that. His eyes glinted with a feverish excitement as he stared at the newcomers, and seemed to harbor no suspicion of them.

“We are, um, new to the worship of the Dol’Gurthog,” Vulk offered. “We have been sent by Rythek, the Keymaster, to meet the Great One and become one with Him.”

“Oh, how marvelous!” the cultist exclaimed, and the other two turned briefly from their own indecipherable tasks to grunt pleased agreement. The one nearest the speaker seemed to be working with frog-things taken from the large, dirty glass aquarium, stroking them to encourage the flow of blue slime from their skin. The one nearer the blood-stained rack seemed to be working on creating bone weapons, reinforced with iron bits… a barrel full of completed such stood nearby.

“But the God is sleeping now, as you can tell… Speaker Kythel will come for you when the Great One wakes,” he smiled and gestured at the dark archway off to the group’s right. “Would you like to help with our experiments while you wait?” This time he gestured at the array of bloody instruments strewn about the surface of the scarred and stained workbench behind him.

“Um, well, perhaps another time,” Mariala temporized, and the man seemed to take it in stride. “But if you’d like to tell us about your… experiments… what, for example is that blue slime –”

“Ooooh, the Primordial Ooze!” the man gushed, his excitement doubling. “It is from the Dol’Gurthog Himself! He exudes it and He causes the very earth to put forth a form of it,  here in His womb. To consume it is to be one with Him… and with it, the world shall be reborn.

“Once we have enough gathered, the forests, the lakes, the world will all fall under the influence of the Dol’Gurthog… and we, His humble servants, have been tasked with finding ways to better utilize the Blue Mana to this end… but so many tests require live human subjects, and there are never enough…” He eyed the group speculatively, but was easily diverted by another hurried question from Haplo.

It quickly became obvious that all three men were so far gone in madness that they had lost all sense of reality. They seemed highly suggestible, and Mariala suspected they would be very easy to manipulate into doing almost anything – if they believed their “god” desired it of them…

Before she could think of a way to take advantage of this, however, she noticed that the alluring odor in the cavern had faded away, and a growing stench was quickly beginning to take its place. At the same time, Erol made a slight miscalculation, in the sudden surge of annoyance and impatience that came over him…

Noting, as had Mariala, that the cultists seemed unusually gullible, he decided to cut to the chase and probe for more information about their nasty frog-god. “So, the um, Mighty One must be quite powerful,” he began. “Is there anything He is particularly vulnerable to, that might –”

He wasn’t even able to finish the question before the faces of all three men went from vaguely idiotic friendliness to masks of full-on twisted rage. “Why would you ask about how to harm the Master?” snarled the one near the weapons barrel, reaching out to grab a nasty-looking double-edged blade of razor honed bone.

As the other two also reached for weapons as well, from behind them came the sound of water cascading. As Toran darted forward to intercept the cultist coming at him, Erol turned and whipped up his longbow, nocking an arrow and letting it fly at the nearest of the gigantic green-black frogs lurching out of the lake. But the creature took a prodigious leap, and the shaft flew under its massive form. It came down less than three meters from the party, its companion tight behind.

Toran blocked the maddened cultist’s first blow with his battle-axe, chips of bone flying as the macabre weapon met the enchanted iron of Ergonkïr. The crazed zealot, unbalanced by the block, completely failed to dodge the Khundari’s counter attack. He collapsed with an almost soundless exhalation as his intestines poured out of the gash the axe opened in his abdomen, spasmed, and was still.

Vulk had instantly aimed the Staff of Summer at the remaining cultists, and the faintly glowing strands of the entangling Weaver’s Web shot forth, enveloping both men and their workbench in a cocoon of nearly unbreakable energy, while Mariala had whirled and fired of a blast of Fire Nerves at the nearest of the giant frogs.

The creature was just opening its mouth to launch its no-doubt lethal tongue at Erol, who was scrambling to drop his bow and bring up his trident, and the blast caught it full in the face. With an enraged croak, the beast turned its blind gaze on Mariala and leaped over the gladiator, intending to come down on the woman and devour her in a single gulp.

Devrik swung his battlesword up over his head in a mighty arc which bisected that of the monstrous amphibian – the creature’s guts spilled forth, much like its human compatriot’s had moments before, and it crashed to the ground less than a meter from its target. One clawed, webbed arm reached for her, but fell limp as the beast shuddered and died.

“Thank you, my friend,” Mariala gasped, more than a little shaken by the close call. That gaping mouth rushing down on her had looked big enough to have swallowed her whole! “I don’t think –”

“Ah, I doubt I could have reached the thing if your magics hadn’t weakened it before it leapt,” Devrik shrugged and gave her a wry grin. He flicked the blood and guts of the dead frog off his blade, and they both turned to deal with the last frog.

That beast was preparing to leap into the midst of the group, but even as it left the ground Haplo gestured and gave a shout – three shimmering, almost invisible bolts of karmic energy shot forth from his hands and entered the frog in head, throat and belly. It collapsed to the ground much like its companion, although it continued to twitch until Erol drove his trident through its skull.

The web-bound cultists were trying to shriek in rage and fury at the death of the giant frogs, but their mouths were bound by the glowing strands, and little more than muffled squeaks escaped them. Ignoring them, the Hand drew together to discuss their next move… they knew where their ultimate adversary in this labyrinth lay, but how to deal with such a powerful being…

“It’s clearly a demon-spawn of some sort,” Mariala said. “And we do not have the best record with demons… I don’t think we want to loose a third demon on the world…”

“Well, technically, we only freed one demon,” Vulk argued. “Admittedly, one of the five most powerful demons in existence, but… anyway, the spider-demon was already free in the world, we just failed to banish it once we’d killed its physical form.”

“Well, that’s not a mistake I plan to repeat,” Mariala declared firmly. “Here’s what I propose…”

♦ ♦ ♦

A few minutes later, the group was ready to descend into the thick, noisome darkness of the Dol’Gurthog’s inner sanctum. Both Erol and Devrik had tried, and failed, to enflame trident and battlesword, respectively; the oppressive, cold chaos magics of the caves seemed to choke off their own power.

Toran, however, managed to cast Bladesharp on his battle-axe, giving his already powerful blade a particularly lethal edge, while Vulk spent several minutes in mediation and succeeded in gaining Virtues Armor, its faint glowing golden light providing him with the Lady’s holy protection in the upcoming fight.

In the hopes of softening up whatever waited below for them, Erol tossed one of his crystal spheres, imbued with the power of the Blast of Norinos, down the broad steps and into the darkness of the lair… but whatever uncanny blackness filled that space seemed to be too much for the light magic, and nothing occurred.

Erol then used his psionic Amplification ability to power up his companion’s defensive spells and rituals, while Korwin opened the lens on his bullseye lantern, hoping that its arcane light would again prove able to pierce the frog-demon’s arcane darkness.

And so it proved to be, the beam punching through the murk as the Hand descended the wide, rough stairs into the inner sanctum of the Dol’Gurthog, leaving Jeb and Therok above to guard their retreat.

The chamber was not as impressive as one might have expected for a supposed demon-god – maybe 30 meters wide and 15 meters deep. Its black stone walls dripped with the blue Primordial Ooze, while pulsating, bilious green masses of fungus grew in patches on the rough floor. Scattered bones, human and animal, littered the area, including an large pile of human sculls, topped by an immense giant’s skull, that formed an alter of sorts. A black-robed man stood near this structure, but his fierce glare at the intruders hardly registered, given what loomed behind him in the darkest corner.

Even after seeing all of the sketches and monuments, the Dol’Gurthog’s actual appearance was both horrifying and fearfully impressive. It stared in the group’s direction with empty eye sockets as the four large tentacles rising from its back flailed around above its head. Massive warts covered its body and a dozen horns jutted from the top of its head. Blue slime dropped from monstrosity’s flesh to form puddles on the floor around it. The eyeless stare seemed to flay the soul, and for a moment they all hesitated, caught in a grip of overpowering terror.

But with a collective shudder the companions all threw off the stultifying horror of the creature’s gaze. The Hand grit their teeth and moved forward, weapons ready, and the demonic amphibian gave out a croak that shook the chamber. As the echoes died away a thousand higher-pitched croaks answered, as from a great distance.

“His children come!” shouted the robed figure, presumably the infamous Speaker Kythel. “You shall suffer for your insolence in entering the presence of the Great One with violence in your minds!” He drew a wicked looking dagger and lunged at Vulk with a shriek.

Vulk easily blocked the attack with his broadsword, but the wiry man was limber and fast, dodging his return blow. At the same instance a tentacle whipped out from the Dol’Gurthog, sending Korwin’s lantern flying, and darkness descended like a shroud.

As the light failed Toran leapt forward to strike at the now-invisible bulk of the demon, but the attack was blocked by a tentacle that in turn sent the Khundari flying into a wall.

Mariala cast the Syncope of Shala on the monster, and for a moment it seemed to have staggered the thing. The stench that permeated the air began to fade somewhat… but then, suddenly, a tentacle flashed out of the darkness, just missing her head as she stumbled back. The stench returned in full force, and another enraged croak shook the room.

Erol shot shaft after shaft into the darkness. If the arrows hit he couldn’t be sure, but he suspected, by the sound of  wood clattering to stone, that at least some were knocked out of the air by those damn tentacles. Haplo’s karmic missiles vanished into the darkness as well, but by the squeal of rage that followed, there was little doubt they had hit.

As the others did their best to damage and distract the beast, Devrik stood still in the darkness and gathered all his arcane and mental strength. When he had found his calm center, and the heart of flame that burned there, he closed his currently useless eyes. He sensed the massive bulk of the hideous creature… there! He opened his mouth wide and with a roar unleashed the Breath of Zhone.

The cone of intense flame that blasted forth burned the darkness away and engulfed the monstrous demon frog. As the searing flames made a living bonfire of it, the Dol’Gurthog writhed and shrieked in agony and fury, tentacles lashing out at random. In the light of the burning Toran had no trouble nimbly leaping and ducking away from the flailing limbs, but Kythel, stupefied into immobility at his master’s  immolation, was struck and sent flying into a wall.

Mariala clutched the Bowl of Barsol tightly in both hands, and she felt the moment when the demonic entity that animated the mutant frog monstrosity fled its dying host. She sensed it trying to leap into Devrik. But the power of the bowl was irresistible and the arc of its trajectory, visible only in her inner eye as a streak of violet light, was bent and sucked into the bowl. It swirled ever faster, caught in an inexorable vortex that forced it to the center of the shallow concavity – and then it was gone, at least to her mind’s eye. She felt its raging presence within the artifact, however, and she smiled coldly in triumph.

“Did it work?” Vulk demanded, rushing up to her, the others close behind.

“It did,” she replied, her sharklike smile widening. “Just as planned. The demonic form is trapped in the Bowl, and once we can get it to a proper Temple sorcerer it will be cast back out into the Void.”

The group’s rather raucous response was interrupted by a sudden, heart-stopping shriek. Kythel had regained consciousness and he now knelt on the cold stone floor near the charred, smoking remains of his god, hands clutched to his head and unintelligible sounds – moans, grunts, shrieks and even less identifiable noises – poured from his writhing mouth.

As the Hand soon discovered, all of the cultists still alive in the complex were in a similar state. Their minds seemed completely gone, leaving them trapped in what seemed an unending horror they couldn’t articulate. No amount of talk could get them to respond, and mental probes only threatened to spread the madness to the prober.

The only exception seemed to be old Rythek. When they found the hedge wizard in his chamber he seemed dazed and listless, but clearly not raving mad. As Vulk tended to him he slowly came to his senses, and under gentle prodding, he answered some of their questions. It seemed that he had been kept relatively sane by the Dol-Gurthog so as to act as the demon’s interface with the human world… just as the Crown Prince Laravad had done for the previous two years.

This revelation shocked the company at first, but on reflection made perfect sense. Papers recovered from Kythel’s “office” had further fleshed out the tale – never stable, the Prince had discovered the lair of the proto-demon on a hunting foray from his lodge, while the creature was still fairly young. It had found easy purchase in his mind, and seemed to understand that their ambitions ran parallel, at least for the time being.

The Prince had fed the demon on outlaws taken by his men, travelers seized on remote roads, and eventually on his own servants and peasants. His own sanity had deteriorated, as the months went on, and whether he directed the Dol’Gurthog’s actions or the demon controlled his was unclear. But when the Prince died the demon frog was left to its own devices… and had quickly spread its influence to seek followers/victims in the nearest settlement. If not stopped, there was no telling how far its insanity and power might have spread…

Rythek eventually grew strong enough to move, and agreed to return with the Hand to the village of Hart’s Lodge.  Making their way out of the cave complex the group came across thousands of baby frog-thing corpses, which had apparently been on the way to answer their progenitor’s summons – and died with it. They trod carefully, and with great disgust, over the stinking corpses, already beginning to slough into a fetid slurry.

Once out into the relatively fresh air of the surrounding woods, the group turned to look back at the mouth-like entrance to the caverns. There was a brief discussion about how to keep innocent people from wandering into the underground shit-show, and what to do about the mindless cultists still within, but before anything could be decided Rythek took the matter into his own hands. With a look of fierce concentration, he reached out with both hands and used his apparently substantial telekinetic powers to bring down the entrance to the cavern, sealing the madness away forever…

“Works for me,” Devrik said with a shrug after the dust settled, and turned to lead the way back to civilization… and a cold beer.

A Taste of Wintergreen

Devrik was deeply skeptical of Vulk’s “plan” to seek out and recover the long lost Staff of Summer, but eventually he succumbed to the peer pressure – that, and the boredom of enforced inactivity, due to the winter weather, in a city he knew little of. The execution, by beheading, of the treasonous and arguably mad Crown Prince the day before had also left everyone unsettled, and a little action might do them good. Still, his doubts remained…

“After all,” he grumbled as they rode out of Zhuran’s South Gate two days later, “it’s not like we’re two for two in the freeing-malevolent-entities-from-their-justly-deserved-imprisonment game or anything… so what could possibly go wrong this time?”

The others, having heard it all before, said nothing and the cavalcade proceeded west into the Arnoth Highlands as quickly as the frozen, snow-covered roads allowed. Fortunately the weather was clear and dry, if very cold, and promised to hold so for at least the next fivnight, according to Korwin. And so it proved, somewhat to his companion’s surprise.

They crossed the semi-frozen Eigaril River at the Sarnik Ford on the third day out from the capital. The narrow but fast moving stream’s rocky shallows were slick with a coating of ice, which nearly brought down Haplo’s horse, rider and all. But disaster was averted, if narrowly, and the next afternoon brought the group to the small mountain hamlet of Winter’s Forge.

Nestled in a narrow alpine valley in the foothills of Mount Eigarstal, this was one of several small communities in the region that claimed to be the settlement closest to the Halls of the Winter King. Vulk, after careful study of what texts he could find, and strongly influenced by his dream-intuition (he carefully didn’t emphasis the latter point, especially to Devrik) had come to the conclusion that Winter’s Forge was the real deal.

The hamlet consisted of a half score of ramshackle buildings, the largest of which appeared to be both town hall and occasional inn. It’s two modest arms (they could hardly be called wings) encompassed the local well, and a decrepit sign depicting an ice-covered anvil swung above the main door. The Hand’s arrival was known to all the locals before they’d even managed to inquire about rooms, apparently by some species of psychic osmosis, and the main room began to fill up quickly with curious natives.

Stabling was found for the horses in various stalls or sheds around the hamlet, as were rooms for the humans, eventually – the hamlet rarely received more than three or four travelers at a time, and the Frozen Anvil had only three rooms.

“None of which are fit for a Lady,” the proprietor exclaimed, almost wringing his hands in anxiety. He was a tall, slender man of middle years, his face leathery and his sandy hair fast receding from a high forehead, who went by the name of Olberth.

“I’m sure your rooms are perfectly adequate,” said Mariala with a reassuring smile – which in no way conveyed her certainty that nothing in this miserable mountain pimple was even close to adequate. Thank Shala she’d learned that cantrip for killing vermin in her first year at chantry. “If I may have the smallest chamber, the men can share the other two rooms between them–”

This suggestion was greeted with more hand-wringing. It seemed all the rooms were small, the beds not only small but few in number, and what with the leaking roof in the owner’s own room, well… Eventually, with the help of several of the locals, it was all sorted out and the men assigned various beds in either the inn or one of three other nearby houses. No one, however, seemed willing to put forth their own home as adequate for the Lady’s (Mariala could hear the capitalization) unquestionably refined needs.

The Margrave of Greentower was about ready to put her noble foot down when an older woman, who had entered the common room in the midst of the discussion on settling the men, spoke up. “Oh for the love of Alea, the poor woman can stay with me,” she snorted in exasperation. “I don’t imagine, having ridden out to the arse-end of nowhere, she expected to find a palace. If she says she’s fine with what’s available, why must you make a fuss, Olberth?”

Clearly abashed at this rebuke, but equally clearly relieved to have the intimidating noblewoman taken off his hands, Olberth managed a few garbled words before dashing off to get Vulk, Devrik and Erol settled in their rooms. As the others were carried off by their new hosts to settle into their own accommodations the old woman offered Mariala an awkward half-curtsey, half-bow. Mariala smiled, genuinely this time, and offered her hand, introducing herself. “Mariala, and thank you so much for your hospitality.”

The old woman snorted again, but this time with a smile of her own, and took the proffered hand. Her grip was dry, firm and surprisingly warm. “Arella, pleased to meet you m’lady. And you might want to actually see the accommodations before you thank me.”

As it turned out, Arella’s home was the second largest in the hamlet, after the town hall/inn, and although worn with age it was tidy and clean. The small bedroom she installed Mariala in was both pleasant and entirely free of vermin. She had dragooned a neighbor youth to bring Mariala’s horse along, as her own small stable was, she assured her guest, drier and warmer than the shed they’d planned to house the poor beast in. “My late husband, may he be one with the All, was very insistent that the animals be properly tended to, and I’ve kept it up since his death.”

After she’d had time to clean up and rest for a bit, Arella knocked on Mariala’s door and asked if she’d be joining her friends for supper at the Frozen Anvil. “Everyone will be there, it’s unusual to get any visitors this time of year, never mind so many. It’ll be crowded, but one thing old Olberth does well is set a decent table.” The man in question had to be at least a decade younger than Arella, Mariala thought in amusement.

“Yes, I’d planned on joining my companions,” Mariala replied, reaching for her cloak. “We’re searching for some… information, and were hoping the local common room might be the best place to find it. Will you be joining the crowd?”

It turned out she was, and that she’d been right about the village turning out for the excitement of the exotic visitors. Although every seat in the common room was taken when they arrived, and people lined the walls, Mariala had no trouble finding a spot between Vulk and Devrik. Arella gave one young man near the door a look, and he quickly scrambled to his feet and offered her his seat. Patting him kindly on the cheek with an approving smile, she asked him to be a dear and fetch her a hot cider as she sat down.

The Hand shared with the room what information of the larger world they seemed interested in, telling tales of the recent battles, the narrow escape of the Crown Princess, and the restoration of the king. These remote subjects of his seemed genuinely to think well of the old man, and to be grateful that he was again ruling over them. The fate of the late Crown Prince was glossed over, and no one seemed inclined to pursue the matter – it seemed the usurper was likely to be quietly and quickly forgotten by his own would-be subjects.

The crowd also seemed very interested in the marriage that had united the kingdoms of Nolkior and Arushal, and even the men seemed fascinated by the details of the event. Much discussion was given to how this union would affect Tharkia – would the new Kingdom of Ukala retain Nolkior’s claim to their own country, or would they relinquish it, leaving only Serviar’s claim to hang over the throne, and poor, beleaguered King Balen?

Eventually the conversation was brought around to local tales, and to the legend of the Winter King. A strange reluctance seemed to fall over the crowd as Vulk and Mariala pressed the point. It was clear from their own stories that the hamlet milked the legend for all they could, and that it was the main reason they even had visitors, now that the old iron mine was played out. Yet with these visitors they seemed oddly reticent… the Hand hadn’t identified themselves directly, but the stories they’d told had made it clear that this group was, at the very least, competent.

Eventually several people offered up directions to the supposed “mountain seat” of the Winter King, although claiming that at this time of year it was too dangerous to make the several-mile journey. Both Mariala and Vulk had no trouble detecting the falsehood of these statements, but they also could sense that there were lies of omission going on as well. Letting the conversation be led off onto other paths, the two leaned in to speak quietly amongst themselves and to Devrik.

“I think they know where the true Halls are,” Vulk said in frustration, “but they are adamant about keeping that information secret. They’re happy enough to make some coin sending seekers to some made-up spot, but not to the true location. Why?”

“I agree, my own spells have made it very clear that we’re being actively lied to,” Mariala said, “and that other truths are being deliberately withheld. But I’m no clearer on the why than you are… Devrik?”

“I take your word on the lying, of course,” the fire mage rumbled. “But I don’t see what we can do about it. We’ve offered money, rather a lot, and yet they seem absolutely –”

“Oh, they are hide-bound, superstitious and fearful fools,” a querulous voice suddenly interrupted Devrik. The three friends turned to find Arella standing close behind them, a look of mixed resignation and annoyance on her face. “I suggest you three join me for some tea at my home. It will be easier to explain there than in the middle of this barn dance.”

An hour later the four of them where seated comfortably enough around the small fire in Arella’s parlor, as the old woman began her explanation. “It’s pretty damn obvious that you lot are more than the usual run of souvenir hunters, thrill seekers or arcane historians we usually get here, seeking the way to the Halls of the Winter King. I’d say you’d be what they call them there “adventurers,” like what the old stories talk about… and the others sense that too.”

She waved her hand impatiently when Vulk began to offer explanations. “Pish, it’s neither here nor there, as long as you’re competent adventurers. That’s what we need right now, though the others might deny it.”

“I’d like to think we’re above average,” Mariala said smoothly, noting the sardonic gleam in Devrik’s eye and cutting off any snarky comments he might have been inclined to offer. “But please, won’t you tell us why you feel the need for someone like us just now?”

“Well, that’s why we’re hear, dearie, init?” the old woman said with a laugh, apparently satisfied about the group’s bona fides. “You see, it’s well know in this hamlet where the ancient fortress and high seat of the Winter King can be found – and has been known for generations. In truth, it’s not far from here at all.

“But you see, our folk were charged long ago to keep the secret from all who might come looking… legends say that after the great Telnori wizard Hastur had defeated the Winter King and imprisoned him in a block of ice deep beneath the mountain, this was the first place he and his apprentice reached.

Hastur was near to death, having been mortally wounded by the fell magics of that giant necromancer, and would never have made it even this far without his apprentice’s help. This was a larger town then, although already much reduced thanks to the years of eternal winter, and there was a physician here… sadly, his skills were not enough, and after a tenday the great wizard passed to the All. But not before exacting a promise from the townsfolk that they would not let anyone near the old fortress, lest his spells be broken and the Winter King freed once more.

“Already the terrible, endless winter had ended, and a marvelous spring was bursting forth with astonishing speed, as if nature wished to make up for all the years of growth lost to the cold. In their gratitude (and fear, lest the miracle be withdrawn) the men and women of Winter’s Forge agreed, and their oath was reaffirmed and taken up by each new generation. Even as time took its toll, and the town shrank to a village, and the village to a hamlet, the faith has been kept.

“But I fear that the time has come to break that faith.” She paused for a moment, lost in some melancholy thought, before resuming her tale.

“In my lifetime, I have seen the winters in these hills grow ever harsher, ever longer, and the effects spreading ever-farther afield. My dear Harult traveled much in the region, and became convinced, near the end, that the spells of Hastur were slowly beginning to fail, and the power of the Winter King was growing and spreading once more. Some in the village dismissed our arguments, saying there have been harsh winters before; but they are willfully blind to what is happening, hiding their fear behind “faith” and “honor.” Others simply no longer really believe in the old legends.

“The believers fear to tamper with what has always protected us, the unbelievers don’t care, and so we sit, sliding ever closer to a terrible doom, I feel it in my bones. I don’t know what you can do, exactly, but you lot practically reek of the uncanny… if you can renew Hastur’s spells, or destroy the Winter King for good, either one… well, I think it’s better to risk it now than wait for him to regain his full strength. I’m too old to be living in eternal winter!

“I will tell you how to find the true High Seat of the Winter King.”

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

That night Vulk had “The Dream” again. Like the previous two times, it was identical in the action it portrayed, feeling far more like a memory than a dream. But this time when the dream faded he didn’t immediately wake up. Instead he floated in a dark void, and after a few moments he heard a voice, soft but piercingly clear… the voice of his Great Beast mentor, Dügora.

“He who takes the High Seat of the Winter King
If his heart be open to Winter’s beauty
Shall see all of Winter’s Realm laid bare
And then the Wheel of Heaven shall be his
To be turned at his will and with the path unlocked
Shall the treasures of Winter’s Heart be opened

As the last syllable faded away, Vulk woke suddenly and completely. He reached for the stick of graphite and scraps of paper he’d been keeping by his bedside since the dreams had begun, and quickly wrote down the words – although they seemed etched in his mind, and he doubted he’d ever forget them. Re-reading them he realized, with a start, that some version of this had been in the Ur-Tel’naru documents he’d been translating – a section that he’d had trouble deciphering, but that now seemed perfectly clear.

He eventually laid back down, certain that he’d be unable to sleep.. but in minutes he had drifted off into a deep and, this time, dreamless slumber.

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

Early the next morning the Hand, having reassembled themselves in the yard in front of the Frozen Anvil, set off along the almost non-existent, overgrown, snow covered track Arella had described for them the night before. The few locals who were up to see them off, which included the anxious Olberth, seem dismayed at their choice of direction, but uncertain of how to dissuade them. All their blandishments and suggestions about the desirability of the opposite, much wider and better tended trail seemed to fall on deaf ears. No one had any illusions about using force on this group, of course…

After several hours of hard travel, they were forced to leave the horses behind, securely tied to trees in a wide clearing at the foot of a steep, stoney slope. Jeb and Therok were detailed to keep watch over them, and the rest of the party continued onward and upward. Arella’s directions had been admirably clear, and they knew from this point it was less than a mile to the “High Seat,” but a mile the horses could never traverse. Indeed, it took well over an hour for the humans (and human-adjacents) to finally come within sight of their goal.

Stepping out of a stand of snow-covered firs, a wide plateau opened suddenly to the east, a steep slope rolling down to the south and sheer cliffs to the north. A frozen  stream cascaded down from the highest cliff in undulating, icy sheets, to “flow” around a pier of stone on a middle level, before tumbling in silent, motionless waves down the lower cliff into a narrow pool then running down the slope to the east.

On the rocky pier was set a circular dais of light gray stone, upon which sat a massive chair of carved granite. Clearly meant for one of the larger species of Gyantari, it remained surprisingly free of snow and ice. A narrow flight of large, deep and high steps was carved into the stone of the nearer cliff, leading up to the central plateau and the High Seat. Unlike the seat itself, the stairs were covered in snow and ice, and looked treacherous. A cold, oppressive weight and a sense of foreboding seemed to bear down on everyone, with the exception of Korwin, who actually felt quite energized.

Before continuing, it was decided that Vulk should send Cherdon aloft to scout the stone chair and the area around them. But as the falcon soared upward in a widening gyre a series of sudden, sharp cracks, like a score of whips snapping at once, broke the snow-muffled silence. Rising up from the shattering ice of the frozen stream to the north were a dozen skeletal corpses of men, the “flesh” that knit their bones made of glittering blue ice. Some bore pitted, rusting blades, others merely razor claws of ice. Between these hideous specters, rising from the ice with them, were great hounds, the size of dire wolves, the solid ice of their forms cracking and instantly reforming as they stalked forward, eyes glowing red.

Erol was the first to leap forward to meet the shambling hoard as it moved toward the group, his trident flashing in the winter sun as he drove it into the flank of the nearest ice hound. It made no sound as it staggered back, great cracks radiating from it side… and it didn’t go down.

Toran had his battle-axe out and chopped mightily at the legs of another ice hound, causing it to stumble but also doing no real damage.

Near the back of the group, Mariala cast Resistance on herself, while Vulk attempted to cast Kasira’s Smile on Devrik, who was rushing forward, roaring out the incantation to Arkel’s Fiery Ribbons. Unfortunately both Vulk’s ritual and Devrik’s spell failed in the cold, forbidding atmosphere of the area.

Haplo, near the front, whipped his hand axe from his belt, swinging it in a mighty arc at the “belly” of the nearest ice zombie, shattering its spine as it claws scrapped uselessly against his armor. Even as it fell to pieces, once again merely lifeless bone and ice, a second one attacked. Haplo continued his follow through, turning it into a powerful counterattack that embedded the axe in the creature’s skull. It, too, collapsed in ruin.

As his spell sputtered out into nothing, an ice hound leapt for Devrik’s throat. The fire mage pulled his massive battle sword from its sheath on his back and counterstuck as he ducked beneath the glittering body. The blow shattered the beast’s hip, and it fell to the ground, writhing as widening cracks ran up its body, until it shattered into a thousand inanimate shards.

More ice hounds, outstripping the more shambling zombies, leapt to attack Erol and Toran, who blocked and evaded, waiting for their moment. Two bore down on Erol, who countered the first attack, piercing the ice warrior’s chest, and nearly dodged the second but couldn’t avoid a freezing gash to his thigh. Toran’s opponent wielded two ice-coated blades, and its attack was swift and vicious. It scored a screeching hit across the armor covering his belly, and managed to dodge the Khundari Shadow Warrior’s counterattack.

Devrik and Haplo both dodged attacks of their own, while Korwin summoned up his Ice Blade. The spell seemed to flow effortlessly from him, and the resultant blade that encased his right forearm seemed both sharper and stronger than any he’d yet manifested. Even so, the ice hound he first swung it at easily dodged his blow, circling around to try and get behind him.

As more of the ice dead swarmed over them, Erol shattered the brittle metal of a frozen sword and the hand that wielded it. Again, fractures radiated out from the destroyed limb, causing the zombie to collapse into shards. At the same moment Toran drove his battle-axe through shoulder of another ice zombie as it clawed at his chest, cleaving the creature almost in two and it shattering it.

Vulk had attempted to turn the clearly undead mob with his holy symbol, but in doing so had sensed no hint of the Shadow. Whatever these monsters were, they were not true undead. Of course, merely necromantically animated corpses were bad enough… Focusing past the dampening effects of whatever magic ruled this place, Vulk again cast Kasira’s Smile, and this time it worked – with a vengeance!

Devrik felt the surge of power flow through him, recognizing the blessing of Kasira. Momentarily free of opponents, he tried again to cast Arkel’s Fiery Ribbons, and this time achieved some measure of success. The spell seemed weak, however, and the ribbons moved sluggishly. Only one fully hit an ice hound, which collapsed to the ground as its legs melted beneath it, while a second hound almost dodged another ribbon, taking only a glancing blow to its left side, which sagged a bit.

The damage caused the beast to turn aside from Devrik, however, and instead it leapt toward Korwin. The water mage’s ice-blade managed to block the bite attack, the ice hound biting down on the blade and inadvertently driving it it through its own skull. It shattered into pieces at Korwin’s feet.

As Haplo and Erol caused more damage to the relentlessly approaching enemies, yet another ice zombie lunged at Devrik. As the fire mage’s counterstrike shattered its right arm and blade, sending a lethal spiderweb of cracks along its torso, the creature still managed to drive its second blade through his armor, scoring a deep cut along his abdomen. The injury itself was relatively minor, but the shock of the supernatural cold hit Devrik like a sledge hammer, driving him down into darkness…

Erol saw his friend topple over, and immediately felt his extratemporal psionic power engage. Time slowed to a molasses flow as he ran across the field to drive his trident into the side of the ice hound that was scrambling over the disintegrating corpse of its former companion to savage the unconscious Devrik. The hound cracked in two, and both halves shattered as they hit the ground. His second attack took the ice zombie shambling toward his friend in the neck, neatly decapitating it.

Haplo and Vulk, momentarily back-to-back, both managed to dodge attacks from an ice hound and an ice zombie, respectively. Toran sent a cross-bow bolt into the ice zombie threatening Vulk, taking off its weapon hand and causing a chain reaction of cracks that ended with it collapsing into shards off ice and bone.

Mariala, drifting back into the cover of the trees, managed to position herself behind another ice zombie as it lurched toward Devrik, who was being helped to his feet by Erol. Neither seemed aware of the danger, and she leapt to the attack with her Khundari dagger, taking the creature in the upper back, shattering it.

Korwin killed another ice hound at the same moment, but was wounded himself in the process – the gash sent a wave of intense cold through him, momentarily dazing him, enough so that, as he staggered back, he was unable to completely block the next ice zombie’s slash at his abdomen. Even as a second wave of black cold washed through him he drove his own ice blade into its head… as it disintegrated into its component parts he collapsed on top of it, unconscious.

Toran was forced to drop his cross-bow as an ice hound lunged at him from less than two meters away; he barely had time to whip two tabûri throwing knives from his belt and hurl them. They met the beast in mid-leap, taking it in the throat and belly, shattering it into several pieces. The creature’s momentum, however, couldn’t be stopped, and the disintegrating body slammed into Toran’s head, momentarily stunning him.

Another ice hound, thinking to take advantage of the situation, had time to be only briefly surprised when the Khundari, whirled around and cut its legs out from beneath it with his battleaxe. Erol took out the last of the ice hounds before turning to help Mariala, who was facing one of the last two zombies. But despite a few dodges and feints she needed no help, driving her dagger into the monster’s thigh, then whipping it back up to shatter its jaw with the pommel as it collapsed.

The last ice zombie lunged at Haplo, glittering claws grasping for his face, only to meet the head of his hand axe instead. As the mindless creature gnawed on the weapon, held at arms length, its arms flailing, Toran stepped up from behind and cut it in two at the waist with a single powerful swing.

As the silence of the snow-muffled mountains settled over them again, the Hand stared warily around, cautious of a second wave of uncanny enemies arising from the again-frozen stream. But when, after several minutes, there appeared no new attack, they began to tend to their wounds. Korwin was revived, and Vulk’s healing ability, along with the group’s vials of Baylorium 7, soon had everyone back in fighting condition.

Once everyone was rested and generally healed up, the group cautiously mounted the stone stairway up to the middle shelf of land that held the small island of the High Seat of the Winter King. The stairs were covered in drifts of snow and coated in ice, the stone cracked and uneven, making the ascent just as treacherous as they had feared. Only Korwin seemed to have no trouble, skipping eagerly up the stairs as if he was in his own home.

As the last of the others made it to the top they found the water mage standing at the edge of the frozen stream that flowed around the pier of rock containing the giant seat.He was unsure, as were his companions, whether crossing the stream might not be a very bad idea – another wave of undead? The water suddenly unfreezing and sweeping people over the falls? Worse?

Erol volunteered to go first, tying a rope around his chest, under his arm pits, while Toran cast Joining of Merkunon to anchor himself to the bedrock of the mountain, the other end of the rope firmly tied around his own waist. Certainly no one would be swept away, should that be the trap that awaited them, and if some other dire eventuality occurred they could at least drag Erol’s body back. Korwin cast Demokirian’s Freeze over the ice and touched everyone in the group, making them able to tread on the ice as if it were packed earth.

With the others gathered near the shore, except Toran who was anchored further back, Erol stepped out onto the ice and cautiously moved forward, wary of any hint of change to the opaque surface. “It seems very solid, very thick,” he called over his shoulder. “I don’t see any indication of water below, even; I think it’s frozen clear to the –”

He was halfway across when he suddenly stopped, in both mid-sentence and mid-stride. After a moment he looked around, then down at the rope tied around his chest, then back at the others. “Why is there a rope around me?” he asked, almost conversationally, as he loosed it and let it drop to his feet. “And who are you folks? It’s certainly very cold, isn’t it?”

“Oh shit,” said Devrik as his friend stepped over the coil of rope and started to wander away. “We can’t pull him back now – I’ll grab him!” He stepped out onto the ice and headed towards Erol. Kowrin also headed out on the ice, but more to get to the other side than to help his companions.

“You idiots, no!” cried Mariala, just a second too late. Devrik, less than halfway to Erol, suddenly stopped and looked around in confusion. Who was the read-headed lady who seemed so upset? What was she so upset about? And why was he standing in the middle of some frozen pond? Come to think on it, who the Void was he, never mind the odd group of people milling about over there?

Korwin, meanwhile strode briskly to the opposite side of the frozen stream and climbed up the short rocky path to the dais that held the giant stone chair. He mightily resisted the temptation to hoist himself up onto it and sit, despite his conviction that he was meant to do so. He’d felt, ever since he’d heard Vulk’s little dream ditty about the High Seat of the Winter King and the treasures of Winter’s Heart, that it was meant for him – the rhyme called to him in a way he’d never experienced before, and he was sure it was his destiny to sit on this throne…

But they’d agreed to go carefully, so he restrained himself, turning back to his companions. Devrik and Erol still stood on the frozen stream, and seemed to be introducing themselves to one another. Trying to, anyway, as neither seemed to know what their name was or who they were. They were distracted by the calls of the others who, with gentle words and promises of answers, gradually lured them back to the “safe” side.

Erol and Devrik approached the strangers warily, hands hovering near their weapons, but they didn’t draw and they didn’t bolt. Mariala tried to explain who they were and what had happened, but it seemed to make little impact on either man. Devrik continued to eye everyone suspiciously and looked dubious as the tale unfolded.

“You’re very pretty,” Erol said suddenly, interrupting Mariala’s monologue. “When we get back to a city or town or whatever, would you like to get a drink?” This stopped Mariala in mid-sentence, her mouth open in surprise. When she didn’t respond immediately, Erol asked if anyone wanted to make a snowman.

“Snap out of it, man!” growled Toran in annoyance, and he slapped the ex-gladiator upside the head, despite their height difference. “Wake up!”

Erol, looking surprised and then annoyed himself, took a swipe at the inexplicable Khundari, who nimbly dodged. He realized he knew what the shorter man was, but not who he was, which seemed odd… his disgruntlement at being slapped vanished when the silver-haired stranger bopped the dwarf on the helmet and told him to stop. As they began to argue he turned with a shrug and began rolling the base of his snowman…

Vulk managed to lead a wary Devrik over to stand near the happily whistling Erol, where he performed the ritual Blessing of Kasira on both men at once. Instantly they froze, their faces suddenly stiff and blank. Then it was obvious that memory and personality were flowing back into them. Erol looked down at the large sphere of snow in his hand, the torso of his snowman, and dropped it in puzzlement.

“Am I making a snowman?” he demanded of Devrik, in some confusion. “If so, why?”

“I have no idea,” Devrik replied. “Anymore than I understand how Korwin got to the other side of the river.”

Vulk, emboldened by Korwin’s safe passage across the ice and his own restoration of his friends’ minds, performed the Blessing of Kasira on himself, then set off across the ice to join the water mage. Safely on the far side with both mind and memory intact, he called across to the others.

“I don’t see any point in risking anyone else at this point. Korwin and I will go up and see what the situation is with this High Seat; the rest of you keep a sharp watch for anything unusual while we’re at it, please.”

The others agreed. No one was anxious to lose their minds just to sit on a no doubt very cold hunk of granite, even if Vulk could probably restore them. As the two men headed up the short path to the dais, they argued about who should sit in the throne first. In the end Korwin deferred to Vulk… right up to the moment when the cantor was pulling himself up onto the seat. Before he could turn and sit Korwin had leaped up beside him, and they sat simultaneously.

To Vulk’s chagrin, he saw nothing, felt nothing – beyond the searing chill of the frozen stone on his ass – even as it was obvious Kowrin was having a different experience. He felt the cold not at all, and as his own ass hit the stone his vision suddenly sharpened – the high seat looked out over the Arnoth Highlands below them, and he could see to the horizon with a clarity, and in such detail, that it took his breath away. The hamlet of Winter’s Forge looked like it was a model just a few feet away… he could actually make out the individual faces of various villagers going about their business…

His attention was wrenched away from this voyeuristic pursuit, however, when a sudden vision appeared in the air before the throne. It was a glowing blue-white orrery of the Ziran system, hovering in translucent three dimensional glory before him. The date glowed in large letters and numbers above the model, and as he reached out to try and touch the beautiful structure he found the planets of the system moved with his motions. As they moved, the date changed, and he quickly realized he could select any date by positioning the planets and moons in their configuration on that date – past or future!

Vulk saw nothing.

Once Korwin had described what he was seeing some debate followed about how the orrery should be manipulated to achieve “the path unlocked.” In the end they found that it was the date of the summer solstice, for any year, that was the key. When the model was set thusly, the vision faded and there was a sudden rumbling beneath their feet. Down the cliff, near the base of the southern slopes, a sudden spray of powdered snow could be seen puffing out and avalanching down into the trees below.

Rejoining the others, the group headed down the slopes to find a massive cave entrance had been revealed by the swinging open of great stone doors disguised as part of the hillside. Cautiously entering, the Hand found a series of large caverns and sinuous, winding passageways leading deeper into the mountain. Great outcroppings of glowing blue crystal grew in patches from walls, floors and ceilings, illuminating everything in a cold, eerie light. A natural stone bridge arched over a chasm where a once rushing stream was frozen far below, and giant steps lead downward.

One level was clearly a living space for a giant of tremendous size… ethereal fires burned still in great hearths in kitchen and hall, giving off no heat, as well as in braziers of bronze and onyx in study and bedroom. An immense bed occupied the center of the latter room, and beyond it a hidden door lead to what appeared to be a treasury. Although the shelves were bare, a massive chest stood at the far end of the long, narrow room, and it drew the party.

Toran quickly determined that the chest, almost as tall as he was, was protected by locks and traps both physical and arcane. While he could defeat the former with his own skill and his magic key, the latter were far beyond his ability to dispel. After the other mages tested their own skills against the magic defenses, Korwin decided to try a more practical tactic. He used his telekinetic hand to unlock the last lock and lift the lid – instantly the chest and everything for two meters around it were encased in ice.

Fortunately no one had been caught in the frigid explosion, but the resultant ice was like steel. Most of the Hand had felt the oppressive weight on their souls increase as they moved deeper in to the Halls of the Winter King, and their own arcane powers waning, especially Devrik. Attempting to summon fire to melt the ice, he found he couldn’t generate so much as a magical spark. Even his psionic pyrokinesis could produce no more than a pale, flickering flame.

Korwin was the only exception, in most regards, to the general malaise. His own powers felt energized and sharper the deeper they went, but at the same time he sensed a malevolence that seemed directed at him in particular. This feeling of jealous rage kept him on edge, and he felt it trying to subdue his powers, even as the sanctum itself (for that’s surely what this was, a natural Avikoran sanctum) boosted them. He was forced to admit that it would take him hours to sublimate the ethereal ice around the chest.

The group decided to leave the chest, for now, and see what they might do once the primary objective was achieved. Moving out of the living quarters they followed more winding, giant stairs down to an even lower level, and so found at last the Great Hall of the Winter King. It was a huge chamber with multiple levels of natural shelves rising from the solid ice floor, and a great dais inset in the southwest wall, upon which was a far more massive and ornate throne than the one outside.

And seated upon that throne was an enormous humanoid figure of solid blue-white, translucent ice, much like the ice hounds in fact. A cold blue light burned in the deep-set eye sockets as it turned its gaze on the intruders, the mere moving of its head sounding like the groaning and calving of glaciers. Massive fists clenched at the arms of the throne, their ice cracking and refreezing as it flexed.

“Who dares disturb the counsels of the Winter King?” a voice both deep and crystalline growled as the Hand stood frozen in their tracks.

“We seek an audience with you, mighty King,” Korwin said, before anyone else could answer. As he stepped forward the figure rose from its seat with the sound of an avalanche and gestured toward the much smaller mage.

“Die, interloper!” it rumbled as a large icy spike flew from the out-flung hand. Korwin’s eyes widened and he tried to dodge, but the freezing spear took him in the thigh and he fell screaming to the floor. His blood froze as it tried to pool around him, and his mind sank into blissful, pain-free darkness.

Erol immediately sent a shaft from his longbow into the left hip of the Winter King, followed almost without pause by a bolt from Toran’s cross-bow, which embedded itself in the giant’s right shoulder. Mariala hurled her dagger at an eye, but the blade was batted aside with ease, sending it skittering across the ice floor.

Haplo pulled his axe free with one hand and gestured with the other, sending a blast of invisible force, in the form of four Mokel’s Karmic Missiles, at the looming enemy. Cracks appeared at the left thigh, both shoulders and the right elbow, but they seemed to heal over almost as quickly as the formed.

The Winter King in turn made a similar gesture, and another spike flew from his hand, piercing Haplo’s right bicep, sending his hand axe and a spray of blood flying and the young mage to his knees, clutching at the wound and attempting to stop the bleeding.

Erol’s extratemporal power kicked in as he tried to cast Burning Shaft on his trident before hurling it at their foe. But the oppressive weight of the Avikoran sanctum caused the spell to sputter out in failure, even as the weapon itself shattered the left shoulder of the giant. The Winter King screamed in crystalline rage, seeming at last to feel something – just as Toran’s next bolt pieced his mouth, blowing out the back of his icy skull in a shower of glittering shards.

The blue fire in his eyes flickered out, and in slow motion the body of the Winter King toppled forward off his dais, to shatter into a million pieces on the floor of the Great Hall. For a moment there was a deep silence, broken only by Haplo’s muttered curses as he tried to staunch the flow of blood from his arm. Then the flood burst as everyone started talking at once.

“That was… surprisingly easy,” Toran said suspiciously.

“Tell that to Korwin,” said Vulk as he knelt by the unconscious man. “And Haplo.” Mariala was kneeling by the silver-haired mage, wrapping an improvised bandage around his arm. “Damn, he’s lost a lot of blood. Go through his scrip, see if you can find the rest of his Baylorium 7s!”

As Toran searched for the precious ceramic bottles, Vulk pulled the chain around Korwin’s neck from beneath his tunic and unstoppered the brass and crystal vial it supported. He slowly poured the dose into his friend’s mouth, making sure he swallowed it and didn’t choke or spit it back up. When Toran handed him the green ceramic bottle which contained a triple dose of the miracle elixir, he poured the entire thing over the gaping wound in Korwin’s thigh.

Almost at once the bleeding slowed, and in less than a minute it had stopped completely. Within five minutes the edges of the wound were visibly beginning to close, the flesh knitting itself back together. Two turns of the glass later, Korwin was back on his feet, if still weak and pale from blood loss, and favoring the wounded leg a bit.

Once satisfied that his friend would live, Vulk moved to check on Haplo. With Mariala’s help he had managed to swallow his own emergency vial of Baylorium 7s, but was more than willing to let the cantor apply the topical version to the wound itself. Nasty as it was, not having nicked an artery it began to heal even more quickly than Korwin’s injury, and by the time the group gathered at the foot of the giant throne he was already flexing his bicep and hefting his recovered hand axe.

“There is no way that this was the actual Winter King,” Vulk began once they’d all gathered. A thorough search of the hall had revealed no sign of the Staff of Summer, and in any case in his visions the Gyantari wizard had been a flesh-and-blood being, not a creature of solid ice.

“I don’t think Hosara-Tar actually turned his enemy into ice… that just feels wrong, somehow. No, I think this was just another animated trap of the actual Winter King, much like those ice zombies and even more like the ice hounds. But I’m not sure what to do next, we seem to have reached the bottom of this fortress…”

“Actually,” said Toran diffidently, “I found a hidden door while searching around for the Staff. I figured if no one else found the thing, I’d suggest we try there. Or even if they did find it, that we might find something worthwhile to loot…”

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

The secret door did, indeed, lead to something worthwhile… after winding down narrow, twisting passages, the Hand came at last down a final set of stairs and out into another large chamber, unlike any they had yet seen. The clumps of crystal there glowed with a pinkish white light, and the floor was made of deeply glowing violet ice. A huge ward was etched into the ice, filling the center of the room, and across from where they stood was a massive throne of amethyst. On that throne sat the true King of Winter, and he was terrible.

His flesh had fallen from his bones at some point, and in its place flickered a cold blue flame. This searingly cold new “flesh” mostly covered his bones, save that his skull shone through the flames wreathing his head. The deep sockets of his eyes glowed with a piercing blue light and a malevolent intelligence. Tattered robes and blackened armor covered him, and in his hand was a black spear of twisted wood, with a black metal point across which pale blue flames flickered.

As the Hand stepped into the room, crowding onto the area of bare stone at the entrance which rose slightly above the glowing violet ice, he rose. He stood almost seven meters tall, and when he spoke his voice was as dead and cold as the void between the stars.

“So, once again the little folk come to challenge my power, the power of Winter. You are fools, and will fare no better than the last witless child to face me.”

“That ‘witless child’ may not have been able to destroy you,” Vulk said, stepping forward to the edge of the ice, inwardly praying to Kasira for strength and wits. “But he certainly succeeded in imprisoning you here for over 13 centuries.”

For a moment the Winter King was silent, and when he spoke it was almost wistful, if only briefly so. “Has it truly been so long? But it is no matter… I may have fallen into that mageling’s trap, my power indeed confined herein – for a time. But for many years since that trap has become my own bastion, its power my power. I have slowly subverted its energies to my own purposes, and am its prisoner no more!

“Whether you come to steal the Staff of Summer or to make sure that the King of Winter is truly dead, you have failed already – for I live! Indeed, I have become immortal; and the Staff of Summer is no more! For behold, it has become the Spear of Winter, and soon it will usher in a never-ending Age of Ice across the globe!” He lifted the spear and slammed its haft down against the ice three times.

While this had been going on, Devrik had been desperately trying to ignite his battlesword with Goraten’s Brand, struggling against the tremendous pressure of not fire that beat against him like an ocean. Five times he tried to empower the spell, and each failure drained a little more energy from him… he could feel the fatigue beginning to sap his physical strength as well as his mental agility, and that last attempt had been almost as draining as the first four combined. Closing out all distractions, he focused his will inward even as he sent out prayers to Kasira and Xydona

As the echoes of the last tap of the Winter King’s spear reverberated, and before Vulk could respond,  Erol and Toran, almost simultaneously brought up their bows and fired. Erol’s shaft flew true, he could feel it, straight for the monster’s heart – almost contemptuously the giant flicked his hand and the spear knocked the arrow aside like it was standing still. A second flick and Toran’s bolt was also knocked aside before it could pierce the “royal” breast.

“Impressive,” muttered Toran, and Erol echoed the thought with a respectful “Well played!”

As soon as the missiles had flown, Vulk had begun the ritual of Kasira’s Smile, seeking to aid Devrik. He knew his friend would need it in this frigid Avikor sanctum more than any of the others. His own will was oppressed by the cold, dark weight of the sanctum, but even through the darkness he could feel the light and power of the Immortal Lady of Luck. And even if it wasn’t the widest channel he’d ever opened, nonetheless he felt Her power flow through him and into Devrik

With a roar, Devrik leapt up from where he had been kneeling behind the others, and his sword burst into flame with a roar of its own, its light and heat pushing back the cold and the dark. The fire mage pushed past his friends and rushed the giant, sword high. “Prepare to meet the true King of Summer!”

The Winter King rushed forward to meet the charge, chanting some incantation that caused his spear to burst into blue flames that radiated a deathly cold to match Devrik’s heat. The two met near the center of the chamber, and the giant was slightly faster – he thrust his flaming spear forward with all his considerable strength straight for his smaller opponent’s gut.

Devrik, still feeling the power of Kasira within him, went low and for the counterstrike. The shock of the blow numbed his right arm, but he kept his grip on his sword even as the Spear of Winter went flying from the Winter King’s grasp to clatter onto the ice to the right!

As the giant reeled back in apparent shock and fury, he was hit at almost the same instant by Mariala’s Passion Nerves spell, and Haplo’s four Mokel’s Karmic Missiles. Unfortunately both seemed to do little more than momentarily confuse, and then further enrage, the giant.

Erol went extratemporal with practiced ease, and hurled his net. The Winter King dodged it easily and dove for his Spear. Toran made a grab for the weapon as well – and beat him to it. The dwarf rolled quickly away and the spear’s icy flames flickered out as he tossed it to Vulk.

Vulk, who had been taken aback by the giant’s claim to have corrupted the Staff of Summer, quickly realized it had been a lie. He sensed the power in the spear, but it had no relationship to the Toraz convocation, or indeed to life itself. It was strictly a tool of death and entropy, and he tossed it out of the cave, into the passageway behind them.

Meanwhile, Haplo had kept the Winter King busy with a flurry of attacks with his flashing hand axe. The giant blocked each blow with iron bracers, but it kept him distracted long enough for Erol, still moving at speed, to entangle the giant with his net, causing him to stumble. To the ex-gladiator’s accelerated senses the opening this gave him was wide and long – his trident thrust pierced the necromancer’s armor and blue fire surged out of the wound in the giant’s side, staggering him.

With the Winter King reeling, Korwin cast his Drunken Hand spell, while at the same instant Vulk Cursed him. Seeing their enemy dazed, Devrik attacked again, bringing his fiery sword around for a mighty blow. The Winter King, who had retreated almost back to his throne, grabbed his own battlesword, propped against it, and ignited it with his icy flames even as he made a lightning counterattack. Fast as he was, he was clearly still feeling the effects of Korwin’s spell, and he staggered just a bit as he attacked – and by that was saved as Devrik’s blade missed him by a hair. His own blade cut into Devrik’s right thigh, however, splitting his armor.

Ignoring the pain, Devrik instantly moved in for another attack, and the Winter King muttered an incomprehensible incantation… three balls of crackling blue energy appeared around his upraised hand, and he hurled them at the fire mage. Devrik just managed to dodge the spheres, and could feel the burning cold radiating from them as they passed.

The giant took advantage of Devrik’s momentary distraction and raised his sword to attack – but before the blow could fall, one of Toran’s tabûri bloomed in his forearm, piercing the fiery flesh between the bracer’s straps and causing him to drop his weapon.

Mariala had been preparing to throw her own knife from behind Devrik, but in having to dodge the Blue Balls of Icy Death herself, she fumbled the blade. Cursing silently to herself as the blade clattered to the ice, she dove to retrieve it and hoped no one noticed her ungainly scramble.

Erol, Haplo and Toran kept up a barrage of attacks on the Winter King, keeping him from picking up his fallen sword and able only to block with his armored forearms. Fire continued to flicker from the gash in his armor, but he seemed little effected by the wound.

As he prepared for his next run, a sudden flash of inspiration struck Devrik. He disengaged from the battle with the Winter King, ducking a blow from his massive fist and rolling away toward the center of the room. Coming to his feet over the heart of the warding sigil etched into the ice, he yelled “This is either going to succeed wildly, or fail spectacularly!” as he raised his flaming blade over his head. Everyone in the chamber froze as he drove the burning sword deep into the heart of the mystic symbol.

The was a flash of blinding violet light, a tremendous CRACK like thunder, and everyone was hurled away from Devrik as if lifted by an invisible hand. Cracks propagated outward at terrible speed, and the icy floor of the cavern broke into dozens of fragments floating on a sea of bubbling, steaming mud. Devrik lay stunned on the largest fragment, his sword cold and inert nearby, the Winter King had been thrown back against his crystal throne, and the others were scattered variously across the floor fragments.

As the combatants slowly recovered from the shock of the blast, a low hum began to fill the chamber and all eyes were drawn toward the center. Rising up out of the mud, surrounded by a glowing green nimbus, was a staff of twisted ironwood, its branches forming a sort of basket at the head that encased a glowing ovoid of translucent green resin.

“At last!” cried the Winter King, his deep, crystalline voice sounding truly alive for the first time since the Hand had entered his prison. He leapt from his throne to the nearest segment of floating floor ice, headed for the Staff of Summer. But Devrik was closer by far, and he staggered to his feet, reaching out to seize the artifact – only to be blown back and slammed into the far wall.

Korwin, taking note of his companion’s fate, attempted to grasp the Staff telekinetically. But it proved impossible – the mental sensation his mind generated was like trying to grasp a perfectly frictionless oval, he simply couldn’t get a grip on it. With a curse he gave up and prepared to focus on tripping up the Winter King as he hopped from floe to floe…

But Vulk had started moving as soon as the head of the Staff had broken the surface of the bubbling mud, leaping like a gazelle from ice fragment to ice fragment, never stopping, never losing his forward momentum. With a final leap he snatched the glowing artifact from where it hovered and came down, the Staff firmly clutched in one hand, on the large floor fragment Devrik had first occupied. He whirled to face the Winter King, who now stopped one ice floe away…

In a timeless moment inside his own head, Vulk confronted the intelligence within the Staff of Summer. Two wills clashed, for what seemed hours, until the will within the Staff retreated, submitting to its new wielder. Vulk knew it would take much more time to fully master the powers of the artifact, but for now he was truly in control. His mind snapped back to full awareness, and he realized only seconds had passed.

He raised the Staff, preparing to deliver a stirring monologue before blasting the Winter King into the Void, when the giant burst into a long, deep laugh.

“Thank you, little would-be mageling,” the giant gusted out gleefully. “So easily manipulated, so deeply foolish. Everything you have done since entering my realm has been by my will. Now, by seizing Hasora-Tar’s cursed staff and making it your own, you have broken his spells of binding and restraint, freeing me at last from the bonds I could never have broken from the inside, not in less than another thousand years! No more painfully extending my power meter by creeping meter, year after slow year; now I feel it all rushing back into me at once, like a river! Soon I – I –”

He faltered suddenly in his gloating, and staggered, dropping to one knee. “No! What is– what–” He held one hand up to his face and watched in uncomprehending horror as the blue flame flickered out and the bones beneath, suddenly visible, began to crack and fracture. In seconds his hand was gone in a spray of glittering blue dust. “How?” was the last, anguished word from his lips before his legs crumbled away beneath him and he collapsed all at once into a swirling mass of glittering flecks. Eventually only the scattered pieces of his armor and scraps of cloth remained atop a pile of bluish dust, before dust, armor, and all sank into the bubbling mud.

“What did you do, Vulk?” asked Devrik as he wincingly pulled himself up from where he’d hit the wall. “Did you use the staff to…” He gestured toward where the last of the Winter King was disappearing.

“No, that wasn’t me,” Vulk answered slowly. “Not directly, anyway. I think… the Staff is telling me… it’s hard to explain! But I think the powers of life contained in the Staff of Summer, combined with his own magics, was what was keeping the Winter King “alive.” He’d tapped into somehow, but he never controlled it, and when the spells were withdrawn – when I took control of the Staff – all the centuries caught up with him at once.”

“So, if he wasn’t lying about manipulating us into all this,” Haplo mused, “then he really killed himself. Ha! Great twist, I love it!”

“Well, now that that’s taken care of,” Korwin said once the general chuckles had died down, “and Vulk has his new toy, I suggest we head back to that treasure room and see about that large, promising chest we left encased in ice. I have a feeling that there’s some really nice stuff in there…”

Aftermath of a Taste of Wintergreen

The chest in the chambers of the Winter King proved to be a treasure trove indeed, and well worth the time it took for the Hand to defeat its final protection. Even with the Gynatari wizard dead, the natural power of the Avikor sanctum continued to oppress rival powers, most especially Devrik’s. But with the malevolent presence of the Winter King removed, Korwin was, quite literally, in his element.

Nonetheless, if took him well over an hour to sublimate away the block of magical ice that had encased the chest. The others explored the rest of the complex as he worked, but found nothing of any great interest, All were gathered back in the treasury room as the last of the ice fell away. It took Toran and Korwin’s combined strength to open the lid, and their eyes widened at what lay within.

Toran’s hands immediately reached out to lift up a blue velvet-lined tray that held six cut gemstones, and he avidly examined and appraised each one, a deeply Khundari glitter in his dark eyes. There were two chrysolites, a diamond, a garnet, an emerald and the most perfect sapphire he’d ever seen.

“These gems are… staggering,” he told the others. “Their cut, their clarity, their size – these are literally the sort of gems that end up in a kingdom’s crown jewels! I’m not the expert that some of my cousins are, but I’d guess these stones to be worth close to 70,000 silver pennies in any Umantari land… and more in a Khundari realm.”

“Maybe crown jewels was exactly what the Winter King intended to use them for, once his conquests were complete,” Mariala suggested, lifting up the emerald to admire the verdant fire in its heart. Green had always been her favorite color…

But as compelling as the gemstones were, there were other items in the chest that generated awe, curiosity and puzzlement. One by one the various pieces were lifted out and examined, and everyone kept an eye on Korwin. There were four jars or vials, the contents of which were not immediately obvious; three written works, all apparently from the Early to Late Imperial Age; two pieces of jewelry, a somewhat garish ring and a stunning circlet of platinum; a wand of bone or ivory; a gladiator’s net and a round shield; and finally, the most puzzling object of all, a small stone-looking vase with a rough stone sphere floating just inside its mouth.

A gray, slightly viscous ointment.
Leafy brown dried herb.
Translucent blue salve.
Clear resin in smoked glass vial.
Silver ring with a diamond and two blue topaz
Circlet of platinum set with a blue-tinted moonstone.
Carved bone wand.
Leather-bound parchment; written in Ruzuvic, using the Razali script.
Wooden plaque-book; written in Ruzuvic, using the Razali script.
Paper bound in carved pewter covers; written in Ruzuvic, using the Razali script.
Cylinder vase, 150 cm high with 60 cm diameter sphere floating above its mouth; vase looks like stone but feels, sounds and acts like metal; sphere appears to be rough stone, and turns in any direction but cannot be removed.
Net of uncertain material – black fiber intertwined with silver threads.
Shield of ironwood and beaten steel, in ancient Torkel stylized serpent motif.

All three of the written works were in what appeared to be an archaic form of the Gyantari native tongue Ruzuvic, written in the Razali script of those people. No one spoke or read the language, but Toran pointed out that their Gyantari friend Ergaboreth presumably still waited for them at home in Shalara, and might be able to help translate.

As they packed up all the treasures for transportation back to Zurhan, Korwin handled each one in an attempt to determine something of their nature or history, while the other mages cast various spells to detect any magical energies. Everything except the vials and books had some touch of the magical, some more strongly than others. The odd vase/sculpture/object d’mystery was more ambiguous – until Korwin touched it. The instant headache and tingling in all his limbs was proof enough that it was an Ancient artifact.

As they were preparing to leave the Halls of Winter King for the last time, Devrik revealed that he would be leaving them for a side trip of his own. He had realized that they were not all that far from Dor Dür, in a direct line, and the old widow in Winter’s Forge had told him of mountain trails that would get him there without too much trouble, even in winter. He planned to collect Raven and Aldari and bring them to Kar Gevdan.

“We’ll return by the southern roads, of course,” he explained. “Then take ship in Tyendus, down the Silvereye up the Arakez Canal, and finally a sea-going ship from Lirilal to Gevdan. I expect to see you all in less than a tenday, if the weather holds.”

The journey back to Winter’s Forge for the others was relatively easy, and they decided to spent the night there again. Mariala and Vulk were invited to stay with the widow Arella, while the others made do as before. For most of the townsfolk the Hand offered up vague comments about their trip, the thrill of being so close to history, blah, blah, blah. But for Arella, the two friends told the entire story. The old woman was enthralled, and thrilled to have been proven right – both in her fear of the imprisoned giant-sorcerer and in her accurate assessment of the group.

They left early the next morning, but took a more leisurely pace, not least because Vulk was thoroughly entranced by his new staff, pausing often to play with it. Or, as far as the others could tell, just sit and stare at it intensely. But the weather was very fair, if cold, and no one was in a particular hurry. The group arrived back in Zurhan in the mid-morning of 25 Novara, just ahead of a major winter storm. By that afternoon they were closeted in an intimate, fire-warmed room with Master Vetaris, the King and the Crown Princess, relating all that had unfolded in the mountains as the snow blanketed the city.

Three days later was Devrik’s 26th birthday, and the Hand was back at Kar Gevdan, when Devrik surprised them all by arriving that afternoon with his wife Raven and their son the wee baby Aldari, having made record time. Devrik seemed strangely glad to see his friends, hugging them each in turn with some heartfelt words of greeting. Even Korwin.

“By Kasira, you act like you haven’t seen us in a year,” Vulk laughed, feeling to make sure his friend hadn’t cracked any ribs. Devrik smiled at him oddly.

“You don’t know the half of it, old friend,” he’d sighed. “I’ll tell you all about it, but not tonight… tonight we party!”

Indeed, the Baron decreed a celebration that night to mark the return of his nephew, and the arrival of his niece-in-law and grand-nephew. It was attended by all Devrik’s local family, their friends, and a significant portion of the surviving Tharkian nobility. The latter were mainly there, Devrik thought somewhat cynically, because the Crown Princess Relina was a guest herself.

Vox had returned from his own visit to the south the evening before the party, to Haplo’s relief – he wouldn’t be the only relative newcomer at the celebration. At the dinner Vox treated him to that night, at the finest inn in Zurhan, he realized he’d really missed the wandering bard and his story-telling skills. He wasn’t sure how much of his tale of southern intrigue and danger he believed, but he enjoyed it anyway.

Both men were, surprisingly, instantly taken with Devrik’s son when they met him the next day. The boy seemed enthralled by Haplo’s silver hair and Vox’s violet eyes, and they both readily agreed to take charge of the babe when his mother needed a break, competing to see who could make him laugh the most.

“Although, you say he’s not yet a year old?” Vox had said to Mariala, once Raven had gone off with Princess Relina to help her prepare for the party. “I don’t know much about children, but he seems… much older than that to me. I mean, I don’t think I was talking at this age…”

“Well, yes, he does seem to have grown tremendously since last I saw him,” Mariala admitted, playing pat-a-cake with the… well, no longer a baby, really… and frowned in puzzlement. “Still, he’s a rather special boy, so maybe he’s just a fast grower, amongst his other… talents.”

The birthday itself was a relatively restrained affair, thanks to the presence of the Princess, but once the royal and noble guests had departed the next morning, the party had continued for another two days, in typical Olvânaali fashion. While the men reveled in the drinking, contests of strength and epic story telling, Raven had had quite enough after that first day, and retired with the baby to the chamber the Baron had given over to the use of his nephew and niece. Mariala joined for some quiet talk, having had enough of the carousing herself. The two women had always gotten on well, but this was the first time in a long while that they’d had to just enjoy one another’s company. They shared stories of their respective, and very different, youths and Mariala was able to provide a different perspective on the tales of the Hand’s adventures than Devrik shared with his wife.

It was also where Mariala learned what had really transpired on their recent trip from Dor Dür. Suddenly Aldari’s amazing growth spurt made more sense! She entirely agreed with Raven’s request that they keep the story private, just another secret of the Hand.

Most of the men, meanwhile, were variously incapacitated over the three day celebration by sex, drink, and ballads… and a few fights, none of them fatal, thankfully. The Baron did opine, with apparent sadness, that this latter fact was proof of the decline of his proud folk into the decadence of “civilization.” But that not withstanding, he declared the celebration a success – just before he passed out over his mead horn.

The first of Margas finally saw the company sobering up (and nursing hangovers at differing levels of legendary). Raven was adamant that the celebration of her son’s first birthday, a tenday hence, would be a quiet family affair. Even Lord Tynal hesitated to argue with her implacable certainty on the matter, and left the matter entirely to the mother, Mariala and his own daughter, Nina. Princess Relina herself added a few suggestions, and a small purse, when she visited again for the celebration of the Midwives’ Festival on the 5th.

In between their own studies, sparring workouts and the on-going examination of the items recovered from the Winter King’s treasury, each member of the Hand of Fortune worked on a gift for the wee baby Aldari. Each gift was meant to be a unique reflection of themselves for their honorary godson to remember them by as he grew older.

The day of the party was gray, wet and cold, but the Great Hall of Kar Gevdan was warm and well-lit with two large fires, scores of candles in chandeliers and sconces, and bronze braziers scattered about the tables. The blue and silver decorations of the winter season festooned the walls and windows, and Vulk invoked the Immortals’ blessings before the feast began.

While the guest of honor was mostly oblivious to the festivities, he did enjoy gnawing on a bone that Brann kept eying forlornly from his spot beneath the child’s highchair, and was particularly taken with the colorful scraps of cloth and ribbon that wrapped many of his gifts – if not so much with the gift themselves. His parents, however, were greatly moved by the treasures that their friends offered up to their son, each one clearly the result of great personal thought and deep love.

The following 35 days, until the quaternary celebration of spring on the Saridás, were spent in various individual pursuits and the occasional pairing up of two or more of the friends. The tail end of winter in Tharkia was colder, and brought more snowfall, than usual, but was also interspersed with stretches of bright, clear days which, if still colder than the area’s maritime climate was used to, made enjoyment of the city and countryside’s winter wonderland a delight.

Devrik, Raven and the wee toddler Aldari spent most of the time at Kar Gevdan, enjoying a long stretch of uninterrupted time together as a family. They visiedt their friends twice at their quarters in Master Vetaris’ former safe house, now the official consulate of the Kingdom of Ukalus, when the weather allowed. The toddler was somewhat bemused, on these visits, at the number of snowmen (and women) his putative uncles and aunts insisted he build with them… although he actually seemed more interested in learning to throw snowballs.

On the night of the Banquet of Delights, the holy celebration sacred to Kalura, the Immortal of Love and Beauty, Vulk, Erol and Vox attended an exclusive party at the House of the Blue Moon, one of Zurhan’s most elite entertainment establishments. It was to be a festive night, but took on a different quality as they became embroiled in the Mystery of the Missing Courtesan.

The proprietress of the house, Misandril went suddenly missing, and through a wild and dangerous night the three pursued the matter. By an hour after sunrise they had returned the grateful lady to her rightful House, slain a number of miscreants, and brought the mastermind of the plot to the King’s Justice.

They were amply rewarded in ways that pleased them all far more than mere money would have. Vulk was in a slightly melancholy mood as they headed home in the gray dawn, but Erol soon cheered him up with the reminder that they still had a significant line of credit at the House of the Blue Moon

Korwin’s 26th birthday followed just two days later. He skipped out of town, despite Mariala’s attempts to throw him a party, to spend a few days at Kar Gevdan… and by the slate-gray sea. Raven and Devrik insisted he join them for a sedate (by their standards) family dinner on the evening of his birthday, but for several days after they left him to his own devices. His time spent walking the strand and, on one occasion, taking a small skiff out on the waters of Borathet Bay, seemed to recharge his soul and he returned to Zurhan more relaxed and centered than he’d been in a long time.

Toward the end of Margas Haplo and Toran, after several long days together investigating the powers and possible command words for the strange wand recovered from the halls of the Winter King, spent a raucous evening making the rounds of some of the more disreputable gambling dens and drinking houses of the city. An unfortunate misunderstanding over what may, or may not, have been illusory gold used to place a bet and unfounded accusations of Khundari manipulation of a certain roulette wheel, led to a spectacular brawl, a running fight through the alleys of Cheapside, the burning down of two taverns and a brothel, and ended in the appearance of a massive blue dragon on the roof of a tenement.

The dragon’s ear-splitting roar and fierce display of the prodigiously long and sharp teeth lining its gaping maw, brought the chase to a sudden halt. As the beast stooped down upon them, its great wings stretching across the street and blocking out the almost-full greater moon, the denizens of the ghetto suddenly realized that perhaps their grievances with the Dwarf and the silver-haired human were not that important in the larger scheme of things… and simultaneously remembered pressing engagements in quite distant parts of the city.

As the dragon took to the air and vanished over the roofs of the city, Toran and Haplo quickly made their way back to the better part of town and home… down a little gold perhaps, but richer in experience and knowledge. Haplo was particularly happy that he’d figured out how to use his new Wand of Draconic Illusion, at least in part. They both agreed it had been a great night and they should do it again. But maybe not soon…

Mariala spent much of her time, when not engaged in personal study or the examination of the loot from the Winter King, visiting with the Crown Princess Relina and her chief Lady-in-Waiting Nina Askalan, forging significant bonds with both women. Relina, at 21, was a very self-contained and reserved woman, but with a quiet and wicked sense of humor, when she let it out. Mariala noted many similarities, and a few stark differences, between the Princess and Queen Miralda. She also developed a positive fondness for Devrik’s cousin, Nina, just a few months younger than herself, and possessed of both a fierce intelligence and great physical courage.

Lady Nina occasionally joined Mariala for her twice-weekly training sessions with Ser Erol, both to learn from the ex-gladiator’s varied combat techniques and to share her own Northern battle training with her new friend. But it was just Mariala and Erol on the afternoon of 11 Sarnia when he asked her if she’d care to join him that evening to help him celebrate his his 658th birthday (or at least his body’s birthday; his… spirit’s? Soul’s?… 26th birthday wouldn’t be until Vento).

They enjoyed a pleasant evening of good food and wine at the Singing Mermaid Inn, talking about the metaphysical puzzles of Erol’s unique situation and her own evolution as a mage and adventurer. Pleasant, that is, right up until they stumbled across a Darikazi ring of spies and slavers operating out of the inn… the resultant contretemps affected only the wing of the building directly under the collapsed cellar, fortunately, and did net half a score of brain-fried spies, seven dead ones, and a dozen youths freed from bondage.

Two days later, in the early hours of the morning of 13 Sarnia, a moderate earthquake shook the region around Zurhan and Kar Gevdan, waking everyone with a jolt. Several buildings in the city suffered minor damage, and five people were injured, with similar causalities reported from Kar Gevdan and its town. Things were quickly cleaned up, and the event was barely a road bump in the preparations for the upcoming spring equinox celebrations.

The big three day festival to celebrate the end of winter and beginning of spring began on 15 Sarnia with the Alean festival of the Blessing of the Rains. It was followed by Sardiás itself, the High Holy Day of Spring, and concluded with Kasira’s own Festival of Luck. Cantor Ser Vulk was asked to preside over the King’s own household celebration in the royal castle, and all the Hand were present, along with the Baron of Gevdan and his sons and retainers.

The day after that very auspicious Kasiran celebration Vulk, Devrik and Mariala were summoned to the King’s private audience chamber for a breakfast meeting. Master Vetaris was there along with Tamor Lahanus, the King’s brother-in-law and Lord Chancellor of the realm. The formalities were somewhat perfunctory, as everyone already knew everyone else, and the group was quickly seated at the large table under the great chandelier that lit the windowless room.

“We have asked you here,” the Lord Chancellor began, “because His Majesty has a request of you… that is, of your adventuring company, the Hand of Fortune.

“Although you are agents of the crown of Ukalus,” the King took up the thread,” nonetheless you have proven more than once to be friends Us, Our family and Our realm. With the advice and consent of Master Vetaris, We would ask you to undertake one more task for Tharkia before you leave Us.

“No, no,” he smiled when they demurred. “I know you all long to return to your own homes and your own affairs, and I suspect you have tarried this long only because Ser Devrik’s family was able to join him here. But the weather has turned with the season, and in no more than a tenday, two at the most, the roads will begin to be passable.” He frowned suddenly at that, a suffered a small coughing fit.

“Forgive me,” he said, sipping from a goblet of heavily watered wine. “I just can’t seem to shake this cough. In any case, once the roads are clear the spring campaigning season will begin, and the remaining mercenary forces that my… that were brought into my realm are not under my control. Before a peace with Ukalus can be cemented these alien forces must be rooted out and the Crown regain full control of the realm once more.

“In the meantime, a most disturbing bit of intelligence has come to Our Lord Chancellor from a small village in the Verduth Woods in the south. It seems that a great many people have gone missing in recent months, and strange, perhaps uncanny, events have plagued the area. With the kingdom still in such disarray, and Our forces so scattered and divided, the usual resources are not available to Lord Tamor.”

“Indeed,” the Chancellor agreed with a sigh. “When word first reached me, I perhaps did not take it as seriously as I should have… but given the disarray of the city and… well, suffice it to say, I sent two men-at-arms, all I felt I could spare, to investigate the matter. It’s been over a tenday and there’s been no word… until today, when another messenger arrived from the Reeve of Hart’s Lodge Village. More lurid and confused tales and the vanishing of the King’s Men…”

“Given the possibly arcane nature of the problem,” Master Vetaris said, “it was thought that the Hand might be best equipped to deal with… whatever awaits in this isolated woodland village. Assuming you’re willing to undertake the quest, of course…”

The Legend of Kal the Mariner

Olvânaali lore tells of a sailor by the name of Kâl who hated being wet. He would complain bitterly whenever it rained. This was inconvenient because he spent a good deal of time with his companions in an open boat on the North Sea. Perhaps he did not realize that a good seafarer endures hardships like these in silence. One day, Kâl fell overboard in a storm, and the Immortal Tyvos turned him into a Shuind’or. Whether this was reward or punishment none know.

The legend tells that, to this very day, a medium-sized wave will occasionally wash onto ships from otherwise calm seas: sailors believe that it is Kâl trying to get aboard to get dry.

Legend of the Orivax of Musira

Hendrith Kuldan was an Umantari T’ara Kul of no small skill, who lived in the 22nd Century in the land of Musira, then a possession of the resurgent Ocean Empire. Hendrith hoped to construct a new kind of golem, one powered by a true elemental. For over ten years he labored, and in the end he constructed a 15 meter long, 5 meter tall solid bronze statue of a giant serpent. It was made primarily of bronze, etched in exquisite detail, its flared head inlaid with designs of gold and silver, with eyes of polished steel, and the body articulated in 40 segments. All who saw it agreed, it was a magnificent work of art, utterly unique.

When the body was complete Hendrith summoned a powerful Orivax into his masterpiece to provide the artifact’s animus. He successfully summoned the metal elemental, an especially voluminous one, given the mass of the body being offered, and it did, indeed, animate the statue. The already beautiful artifact became something transcendent as it came to “life,” moving in a sinuous, almost sensual undulation, raising its head up over the mage and his gathered witnesses.

Whether it was his own distraction at the sheer majesty of what he had crated, or merely a failure of his will matched against such a powerful elemental, the reason hardly matters. The fact is, Hendrith failed to control the Orivax, and the creature promptly left to explore the material world in its splendid new body. The bronze serpent glowed cherry red, burning a hole through the stone of the distraught mage’s sanctum, and then plunged into the earth, burrowing so quickly that it was lost to sight in seconds.

Hendrith, and almost all of his guests, survived the renegade elemental’s departure, but over the next several years others would not be so lucky. The Orivax would emerge from time to time from beneath the earth to inflict great damage in various spots around the world.The most infamous of the creature’s rampages was in the city of Kol-Tiran – once renowned for its wide avenues and magnificent gardens, and now known only as the Lost City of Kol-Tiran.

Eventually, the Orivax wearied of its “material adventure” and it abandoned its metallic body, although precisely where and when no one alive knows. The moral of the tale is unclear, unless it is simply that when dealing with great powers, it is best to employ extreme caution… or simply don’t deal with them at all. And that, somewhere, there is a very large, very ornate, and quite valuable former host mass waiting to be found…

Aftermath of Saving Princess Relina

The Hand’s return to Tharkia with the rescued princess and her entourage was a triumphant one. The king was overjoyed, the people jubilant, and the Baron of Gevdan both relieved and deeply impressed with his nephew and his nephews boon companions. Once the initial celebration was spent, he insisted that Devrik and the others spend some time at Kar Gevdan. The king granted them leave to do so, but only for a span of days, as he much desired their council as he set about reordering his kingdom and trying to end the war with Ukala whilst keeping his kingdom intact.

After being hosted by the Baron Gevdan for three days most of the Hand were quite happy to return to Zurhan and their comfortable quarters in the former safe house Haplo had set up for Master Vetaris. None of them considered themselves lightweights when it came to partying, but the Olvânaali took the sport to a whole new level. Although Devrik remained to enjoy time with his family, and Vox joined him for the stories, the others were content to return to sobriety and even politics.

Master Vetaris himself spent much of his time at Kar Zurhan, meeting with the king, his military advisors and the surviving Tharkian nobility who had managed to return to the city once it was freed. But he had felt it proper for neither himself nor the Hand (they were, after all, official agents of the Crown of Ukala) to actually stay in the royal castle. Mariala, Vulk and Toran often accompanied him to the castle, however, as witnesses for their own rulers, as did Haplo, ostensibly the Gray Mage’s private secretary. Erol and Korwin, with little interest in the local politics, spent much of their time getting to know the city in which they seemed destined to spend the winter.

While they were all anxious to return to their own homes, most especially Devrik, who missed Raven and the wee baby Aldari intensely, no one was in any hurry to find out if Madame Vortex had booby trapped any other Nitaran Gates. Master Vetaris thought it unlikely, and himself used the local Gate occasionally to return to Shalara, but he was still working out exactly how his mother had done what she did in the first place, and he couldn’t guarantee their safety. With a harsh winter in full swing and enemy troops still thick between Zurhan and the Ukala border, it seemed the Hand were stuck.

When not meeting with the Tharkians, Vulk spent much of his free time going over the papers and scrolls that Mariala had liberated from the vestry of La’Urantu (as he’d learned the Ur-Tel’naru priest they’d killed in the Golden Skull Shrine was named). He still retained a moderate facility with the Dark Telnori tongue (Reshki, they called it), and since they used the same Omünish script as the true Telnori he could read it, if haltingly.

Almost a tenday after their return from Barasina Island Vulk stumbled onto a reference that caught his full attention and, after doing a little research in both the library of Kar Zurhan and that of their own house, he called the others together to discuss it. Devrik had finally returned from Kar Gevdan, and was running out of entangled parchment with which to communicate with his wife, making him restless and more than a little snappish.

“Are you all familiar with the old Legend of the Winter King,” he asked as everyone tucked into the breakfast he’d arranged in Vetaris‘ study. Everyone made agreeing noises around their food and hot chocolate, if not terribly interested ones.

“The one about the Gyantari wizard who became a master of the Avokari Convocation and called himself the King of Winter?” Mariala finally offered, taking pity on her friend, though she didn’t see why he was interested.

“The Winter King, actually,” Vulk smiled. “The stories are always very uniform on that point. But yes, that’s the one. I found a reference to the tale in the papers you recovered from Barasina, and notes on the actual location of the Winter King’s mountain fortress.”

“Really?” Mariala’s interest was suddenly piqued. “I had no idea the story was that old.”

“It’s not, which is part of what caught my eye, at first… it’s a disturbing point, if it means the Ur-Tel’naru have received outside information since their imprisonment. As far as I can tell in doing my research, the story is about 1300 years old… the events that inspired it must have happened at least two centuries after the Dark Telnori were exiled to Barasina.”

“Intersting, if true,” Korwin said, pouring another cup of chocolate. “But more of a long term issue for the Star Council to address, rather than an action item for the Hand of Fortune, I should think”

“If that’s all it was, yes,” Vulk said. “But the night after I discovered this information I had a dream. And it was one of those dreams… I think most of us have had them? The kind that are more than just dreams.”

All of the Hand who had been at the lost city of Yalura, and been possessed by the Great Beasts, suddenly looked more serious… the others just looked confused.

“I dreamt of the battle between the Winter King and Hasora-Tar… which was the Telnori mage’s actual name, not Hastor as the modern story would have it. It was as if I was truly there, and it was a massive arcane fight. Although it didn’t last for  three days – more like three hours, which was impressive enough. I saw the two retreat into the Winter King’s fortress, but the vision didn’t follow… after a time Hasora-Tar reappeared, alone and without his staff. He was badly injured, but he left the mountain top alive, and at that point the dream faded and I woke up. It’s still as clear in my mind as when I first awoke.

“Then I had the dream again last night. Identical in every respect, as if it truly was showing what had, in fact, occurred… like one of those stories made of moving images we saw on Areth. And, in that way you know things in a dream, I knew that Hasora-Tar was also the mentor and teacher of Dügora Oakheart, the Telnori who became the Great Beast of Earth, Ghoratok. The mentor who bequeathed me my own Torazin powers.”

“What are you saying Vulk?” Devrik asked, eyes lighting in sudden interest.

“I think Dügora is telling me that I – we – should find and recover the Staff of Summer.”